HP Compaq nc6300 Maintenance And Service Manual
Main tenan ce and Ser vice Gu id e HP C om paq nc6 3 00 Not ebook P C HP C ompaq nx6 3 00 Notebook P C Doc ument P art Number : 415 7 9 3-001 June 2006 This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining and servicing the computer . It provides comprehensi v e information on identifying computer features, components, and spare parts; troubleshooting computer problems; and performing computer disassembly procedures.
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-P ackard Dev elopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel, Celeron, and Core are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used by He wlett-Packard Company under licen se. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S erv ice Gui de HP Compaq nc6 300 Notebook PC HP Co mpaq nx6 3 00 Notebook P C F irst E dition: June 2006 Doc ument P art Number : 415 7 9 3-001
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide iii Cont e nt s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â22 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the System Configuration Menu. . . . 2â5 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6
i v Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â22 3.4 Cable Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â23 3.5 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â24 3.6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â26 3.7 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â29 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6
Cont en ts Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â5 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.6 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â12 5.7 External Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â16 5.9 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â20 5.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â23 5.11 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â29 5.12 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â30 5.13 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â33 5.14 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â35 5.15 Internal Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â36 5.16 Mini Card WWAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â38 5.17 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â40 5.18 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â43 5.19 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â46 5.20 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â51 5.21 Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â54 5.22 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â56 5.23 USB/Audio Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â59 5.24 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â61 5.25 Serial Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â64
v i Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 6 Specifications A Screw Listing B Software Backup and Recovery C Display Component Recycling D Connector Pin Assignments E Power Cord Set Requirements Index
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Compaq nc6300 Notebook PC and HP Compaq nx6300 Notebook PC of fer adv anced modularity , Intel® Core⢠Duo, Intel Core Solo, and Celeron® M processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP Co mpaq nc6 300 Not ebook PC and HP Co mpaq nx6 3 00 Notebook P C
1â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1.1 F e a t u r e s â Numerous references are made throughout this Maintenance and Service Guide to âfull-featuredâ and âdefeaturedâ units. A computer model is considered to be full-featured if it has 4 Uni v ersal Serial Bus ports, an ExpressCard slot, and the follo wing components: â V olume control b uttons â Info Center b utton â Digital Media Slot â Serial port â Parallel port â S-V ideo-out jack â Docking connector A computer model is considered to be defeatured if it has only 2 Uni v ersal Serial Bus ports and none of the components in the preceding list. â The follo wing processors are a v ailable, v arying b y computer model: â Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz), T2500 (2.00-GHz), T2400 (1.83-GHz), or T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor â Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.66-GHz) processor â Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz, 1.60-GHz, or 1.46-GHz processor â The follo wing displays are a v ailable, v arying by computer model: â 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT (1400 Ã 1050) with o ver 16.8 million colors â 15.0-inch or 14.1-inch, XGA, TFT (1280 Ã 800) with ov er 16.8 million colors â 100-, 80-, 60-, and 40-GB high-capacity hard dri v e, v arying by computer model
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â3 â 256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 400 MHz and 533 MHz, expandable to 2.0 GB â Microsoft® W indows® XP Professional â Full-size W indows k e yboard with embedded numeric ke ypad â Pointing stick (select computer models only) and T ouchP ad pointing de vices â Integrated 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack â Integrated wireless support for Mini PCI IEEE 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g W ireless LAN (WLAN) de vice â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card broadband wireless wide area network (WW AN) de vice â Support for one optional T ype I, T ype II, or T ype III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card, v arying b y computer model â External 65-watt A C adapter with 3-wire po wer cord, v arying by computer model â 6-cell Li-Ion battery â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical dri v es: â CD-R OM dri ve â D VD-R OM dri ve â D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Dri ve â D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri ve â Connectors: â Audio-out (headphone) â Audio-in (microphone) â Uni versal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0 (two to four , varying by computer model) â Po wer
1â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion â External monitor â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â IEEE 1394 â Accessory battery â Digital Media Slot (select computer models only) â S-V ideo-out (select computer models only) â Docking connector (select computer models only) 1 .2 R eset tin g t he C omp uter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w the steps belo w to reset the password. These steps also clear CMOS. â The follo wing steps will not clear an unkno wn password if the stringent security option has been enabled in the BIOS. If stringent security is enabled, the system board must be replaced to reset an unkno wn password. Refer to Section 5.24, âSystem Board, â for more information on replacing the system board. Before replacing the system board, perform the steps belo w to make sure stringent security has been properly enabled. Enabling stringent security provides enhanced protection for the po wer -on password and administrator passw ord and other forms of po wer -on authorization. Stringent security is enabled/disabled by accessing the P assword Options menu in the Computer Setup utility . Refer to Section 2.1, âComputer Setup, â for more information. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information).Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.14, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery).
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â5 2. W a it approximately 5 minutes. 3. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 4. Connect A C power to the computer . Do not reinsert any batteries at this time. 5. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha v e been cleared. 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e po wer . The computer supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le v el of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F r ont Components Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice has been enabled. 2P o w e r l i g h t â Green: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An A C adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is o ff or in hiber nation.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â7 3 Batter y light â Amber : A batter y is charging. â Green: A batter y is close to full charge capacity . â Blinking amber : A batter y that is the only av ailable po wer source has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking more quickly . â Off: If the computer is connected to an e xter nal pow er source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not connected to an e xternal power source, the light is tur ned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 4 Drive light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 5 Stereo speakers (2) Produce system sound. 6 Displa y release latch Opens the computer . 7 Digital Media Slot (select computer models only) Suppor ts 7 optional digital memor y card f or mats: SD (Secure Digital) Memor y Card, MultiMediaCard, Memor y Stick, Memory Stick Pro , Memor y Stic k Duo (with adapter), Smar tMedia cards, and xD-Picture Card. 8 Digital Media Slot light (select computer models only) On: A digital memor y card is being accessed. Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the right side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-2. R igh t -Si de Com ponents
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â9 Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 USB por ts (2; select computer models only) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connect an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e xternal pow er source. 2 1394 por t Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , digital camera, or digital camcorder . 3 RJ-11 (modem) jack Conn ects the modem cab le. 4 Optical drive Suppor ts an opti cal disc. The type of optical drive v ar ies by model. 5 Serial por t (select computer models only) Connects an optional serial device .
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the left side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-3. Left -Side Components
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â11 Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional networ k cab le. 2 Exter nal monitor por t Connects an optional V GA e xter nal monitor or projector . 3 Exhaust v ent Pro vides airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only on a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow another hard surf ace, such as an adjoining optional printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . 4 USB por ts (2) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cab le, or connect an optional External MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e xternal pow er source. 5A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Connect optional headphones or pow ered stereo speake rs. Also connects the audio function of an audio/v ideo de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. 6A u d i o - i n (microphone) jack Connects an optional monaural microphone. 7 PC Card slot Suppor ts optional T ype I, T ype II, or T ype III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. Some computer models ma y be shipped with a smar t card reader instead. 8 ExpressCard slot (select computer models only) Suppor ts optional ExpressCard/54 or ExpressCard/34 cards.
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-4. Re ar P a n el Co m po n e nt s
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â13 T able 1-4 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . Ã The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but ma y not pre v ent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y . 3 P ower connector Connects an A C adapter or an optional pow er adapter . 4 P arallel por t (select computer models only) Connects an optional parallel de vice, such as an e xtern al disk ette drive or a printer . 5S - V i d e o - o u t j a c k (select computer models only) Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card.
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K ey board C ompone nts
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â15 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboar d Components Item Component Function 1 fn ke y Ex ecutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function ke y or the esc key . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and turns on the caps loc k light. 3 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erform system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key , s ever al ke ys and b uttons perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 4 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and turns on the num loc k light. 5 K eypad ke ys (15) In Windows , can be used like the ke ys on an e xter nal numeric k eypad. 6 Arrow k e ys Mov es the cursor around the screen. 7W i n d o w s applications ke y In Windows , displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 8 Windows logo k e y In Window s , displa ys the Windows Star t menu.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T a ble 1-6. T op Components , P ar t 1 T able 1-6 T op Components, Part 1 Item Component Function 1 P ower b utton When the computer is: â Off , press to turn on the computer . â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standb y , briefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. If the system has st opped responding and Windows shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold f or 5 seconds to tur n off the computer .
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â17 2 Displa y lid s witch â If the computer is closed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the computer is opened while in standby , tur ns on the computer (resumes from standby). 3 Inf o Center b utton (select computer models only) Enables y o u to vie w a list of commonly used software solutions . 4 Wireless button T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off , but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 5 Presentation mode b utton (select computer models only) T ur ns on Presentation mode. 6 V olume mute b utton (select computer models only) Mutes or restores speake r vo lume. 7 V olume down b utton (select computer models only) Decreases speake r volume . 8 V olume up button (select computer models only) Increases speake r volume . T able 1-6 T op Components, P ar t 1 (Continued) Item Component Function
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are continued belo w and described in T able 1-7. T op Components , P ar t 2
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â19 T able 1-7 T op Components, Part 2 Item Component Function 1P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is tur ned on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby , â Blinking rapidly: An A C adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is off . 2 Wireless light On: An integr ated wireless de vice has been tur ned on. 3 Caps lock light On: caps lock is on. 4 Num loc k light On: num lock or the numeric ke ypad is on. 5 Microphone (select computer models only) Records sound. 6 P ointing stick (select computer models only) Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 7 Left/right pointing stick b uttons (select computer models only) Function lik e the left and ri ght b uttons on an e xternal mouse. 8 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Ca n be set to perf orm other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic k ing. 9 Left/right T ouchP ad bu tt o n s Function lik e the left and ri ght b uttons on an e xternal mouse. 10 T ouchP ad scroll zone Scrolls up or down. 11 Finger print reader (select computer models only) Allows a fingerpr int logon to Windows instead of using a pass word.
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-8. Bot tom Component s Ta b l e 1 - 8 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds the batter y . 2 Batter y release latches (2) Relea ses the batter y from the batter y ba y . 3 Docking connector (select computer models only) Connects the computer to an optional doc king de vice. 4 Accessor y batter y connector (select computer models only) Connects an optional HP Ultra-Capacity Batter y or HP Extended Lif e Batter y .
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â21 5 Memor y module compar tment Mini Card compar tment Contains 2 memor y slots that suppor t replaceable memory modules. The number of preinstalled memor y modules v aries by computer model. Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice. Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in the computer by the go v er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in y our countr y . If you replace the de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care through the Help and Suppor t Center . 6 Hard drive ba y Holds the primar y hard dr iv e. 7 Exhaust v ents Provides airflo w to cool intern al components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only on a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow another hard surf ace, such as an adjoining optional printer , or a soft surf ace , such as pillows or thic k r ugs or clothing, to blo ck ai r fl ow . Ta b l e 1 - 8 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov ervie w of key parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Audio â Display â Hard dri v e â Intel Dual Core, Solo Core, and Celeron M processors â K e yboard and T ouchP ad â Memory module â Mini Card module â PC Card à CA UTION: T o pr operl y ventilate the com puter , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) c lear ance on the left and r igh t sides o f the compu ter . The computer uses an electric fan for v entilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected b y high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char gi ng, and software. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARN ING: Only author iz ed tec hnic ians trained b y HP should repair this equipmen t . All tr ouble shooting and r epair pr ocedur es ar e detailed to allo w onl y subas sembl y-/module -lev el r epair . Becaus e of the comple x ity of the indi v idual boar ds and suba ssembli es , do not attempt to mak e repair s at the component le vel or modif icati ons to an y printed w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w ir ing boar d modif icati on may v oid an y war ranty or e x c hange allo wance s. 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not w orking or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in W indows. Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , Diagnostics, or System Configuration menus: 1. T urn on or restart the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, use the cursor control keys to na vigate to the System Conf iguration menu. â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc .
2â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting 2. Select the File , Security , Diagnostics, or System Conf iguration menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the computer: â Select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Restore defaults, and then press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press f10 . Selecti ng fr om the F ile Me nu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Vie w identification inf or mation about the computer , processor , memor y and cache size, and system ROM. â Vie w BIOS re vision, ke yboard controller v ersion, and batter y pack serial number inf ormation.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â3 Selec ting from the Sec urity Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Setup P assword Enter , change , or delete an Setup pass word. P ower-On P ass word Enter , change, or delete a pow er-on pass word. P assw ord Options (P assw ord options can be selected only when a power-on pass word has been set.) Enable/disab le: â Stringent secur ity . â Requirement of pass word on restar t. DriveLoc k P ass words Enable/disab le Dr iveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Smar t Card Secur ity Enable/disab le smar t card powe r-on suppor t. â A setup password must be established to use this feature. TPM Embedded Security Enable/disab le: â Embedded security device state . â P ower-on authenti cation suppor t. â A utomatic DriveLoc k suppor t. System IDs Estab lish: â Notebook asset trac king number . â Notebook ownership tags . Disk Sanitizer Estab lish f ast, optimum, or custom settings f or disk sanitizing. *Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 driv es.
2â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Selec ting fr om t he Diagnos tics Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Diagnostics Men u Select T o Do This HDD Self-T est Options Run a quick co mprehensiv e self test on hard drives in the system that suppor t the test f eatures. Memor y Check Run a quick co mprehensiv e test on system memor y on the f ollowing categories: â W alking 0s â W alking 1s â High Address line testing â Alter nate P atter n testing
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â5 Selec tin g fr om t he S ystem Config uration Menu Ta b l e 2 - 4 System Configuration Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Options Enable/disab le Mult iBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can includ e most bootab le de vices and media in the system. De vice Configurations Enable/disable: â Swap Fn / Ctrl k eys. â USB legacy suppor t. â BIOS DMA data transf ers. â F an Alwa ys on while on A C P ower . â Data Ex ecution Pre v ention. â LAN P ower sa v e . Built-In De vice Options Enable/disab le: â Embedded WLAN De vice Radio . â Embedded Bluetooth De vice Radio . â LAN/WLAN Switching. â W ake on LAN from Off . P or t Options Enable/disab le: â USB P or t. â 1394 P or t. â CardBus Slot.
2â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting 2.2 T roubl eshooting Flo wc har ts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T r oubleshooting Flowc har ts Overview Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roub leshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicab le)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing Deviceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â7 Flo wc h art 2. 1âInitial T roub leshootin g Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K e yboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.2âN o P o w er , P art 1 1. Reset the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Be sure the AC power source is active. 3. Be sure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r up on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r up in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r up on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select computer models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select computer models, the computer can be reset using th e standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power swit ch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â9 Flo wc h art 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r on ? Check batter y pack by recharging it, moving it to another computer , Po we r on ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r on ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.4âN o P o w er , P art 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sou rc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r LE D on? Po we r ou tl e t active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â11 Flowc h ar t 2.5 âN o P ow e r , P ar t 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.6âN o Video, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and computer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking Device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to en su re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â13 Flo wc h art 2.7âN o Video, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting F lo wch a rt 2 . 8 â N o n fu nct i o n i ng Do ck ing De v i c e (i f appl icable) Y N Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. N T est replacement docking device with new computer . Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Replace docking device. Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â15 Flo wc h art 2.9âN o Opera ting S y stem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive. â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 0âNo OS Loa ding , H ard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the Setup Utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order .
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â17 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o OS L oa di n g , H ard Drive, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 2âNo OS Loa ding , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â19 Flo wc h art 2. 1 3âNo OS Loa ding , Disk et te Driv e Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. 1. Replace diskette drive. 2. Replace system board. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the Setup Utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup Utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 4âNo OS Loa ding , O ptical Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup Utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â21 Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 5 âNo Au dio, P ar t 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Replace the docking device.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 6âNo Au dio, P art 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc h art 2. 1 7âN onfunc tioning D e vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 8âNonfun c tioning K e yboard Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc h art 2. 1 9âNonfunc tioning P oin ting De vic e Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc har t 2.20âNo N et w ork/Modem Conn ectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace the NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a talog This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 S erial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
3â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Displa y assemblies f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 430967-001 430966-001 Display assemb lies for use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 15.0-inch XGA, TFT 14.1-inch XGA, TFT 413679-001 413678-001 413677-001 413676-001 2 Switch co ver s (include LED board and LED board cable) F or use with full-f eatured computer models F or use with def eatured computer models 413688-001 413687-001
3â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 K eyboar ds F or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger pr int reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416039-A41 416039-201 416039-221 416039-081 416039-021 416039-051 416039-121 416039-041 416039-151 416039-211 416039-DD1 416039-BB1 416039-061 416039-291 416039-AD1 416039-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416039-091 416039-131 416039-251 416039-171 416039-231 416039-BA1 416039-071 416039-B71 416039-111 416039-AB1 416039-281 416039-141 416039-031 416039-001
3â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 K eyboar ds (Continued) F or use with computer models with po inting stic k and finger print reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416038-A41 416038-201 416038-221 416038-081 416038-021 416038-051 416038-121 416038-041 416038-151 416038-211 416038-DD1 416038-BB1 416038-061 416038-291 416038-AD1 416038-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416038-091 416038-131 416038-251 416038-171 416038-231 416038-BA1 416038-071 416038-B71 416038-111 416038-AB1 416038-281 416038-141 416038-031 416038-001 P ointing stick boar d (not illustrated, includes pointing stic k cable) 413692-001 4 Fan 413696-001 5 Heat sink (includes thermal paste) 379799-001 Thermal Grease Kit (not illustrated) 413706-001
3â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 6 Pr ocessors (include thermal paste) Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300E (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001 430687-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 413682-001 Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.60-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.46-GHz processor 413896-001 413681-001 413680-001 7 T op co vers (include T ouchP ad) F or use with full-f eature d computer models with pointing stic k and finger pr int reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with T ouchP ad and finger pr int reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with T ouchP ad but without finger print reader F or use with def eatured computer models 413673-001 413674-001 413675-001 413672-001 Fingerprint reader board (not illustr ated; includes finger print reader board cable) 413695-001
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit 413704-001 8a 8b 8c 8d Includes: R TC batter y Microphone Memor y/Mini Card module cov er (includes 1 captive scre w) Hard drive co ver (includes 2 captiv e screws) Not illustrated: Computer f eet (6) PC Card slot space sav ers (2) 9 Modem module 399441-001 10 Mini Car d WW AN module 399440-001 11 Speaker 413697-001 12 USB/audio board (includes USB/audio board cab le) 413693-001 13 System boards F or use with full-f eature d computer models with Bluetooth and finger print reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with T ouchP ad F or use with full-f eature d computer models with finger print reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with WW AN 416165-001 413669-001 413670-001 413671-001 F or use with def eatured computer models âGMâ F or use with def eatured computer models âGML â 413667-001 413668-001 14 Base enclosures F or use with full-f eatured computer models F or use with def eatured computer models 413689-001 413690-001
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â13 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categorized as most of the world 1 (MO W 1). 407575-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K o ng Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categorized as most of the world 2 (MO W 2). 407575-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland F rance Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â15 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categorized as the rest of the world RO W . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in J apan. 407575-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409280-004 Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â17 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the United States and Canada. 407254-001 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407254-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland F rance Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Ja pan. 407254-291
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â19 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the United States and Canada. 407253-001 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407253-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland F rance Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlan ds Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in J apan. 407253-291 16 Serial connector module (includes serial connector board cable) 413694-001 17 Memory modules PC2-5300 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â21 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 18 Optical drives (include bezel and optical driv e brac k et) 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive 413698-001 413699-001 413700-001 413702-001 413701-101 19 Batteries 6-cell, 4.8-Ah 6-cell, 4.0-Ah 372772-001 393652-001 20 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cable) 398393-001 21 Hard drives (include fr ame) 7200-r pm 60-GB 413854-001 5400-r pm 100-GB 80-GB 60-GB 40-GB 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 413850-001
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3. 3 Plas tic s Kit T able 3-2 Plastics Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit Includes: 413704-001 1 Memor y/Mini Card module co v er (includes 1 captiv e scre w) 2 Hard drive co v er (includes 2 captive scre ws) 3 R TC batter y 4 Computer f eet (6) 5 ExpressCard slot space sav er 6 PC Card slot space sa ver 7 Microphone
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 3 3.4 Ca bl e Kit Ta b l e 3 - 3 Cable Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Cable Kit Includes: 413703-001 1 T ouchP ad cab le 2 Modem cable 3 USB/audio board cable 4 Ser ial connector module cable 5 Bluetooth cable
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3.5 M a s s St ora g e De vi ce s
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 5 T able 3-4 Mass Storage De vices Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Har d drives (include frame) 7200-r pm, 60-GB 413854-001 5400-rpm, 100-GB 5400-r pm, 80-GB 5400-r pm, 60-GB 5400-r pm, 40-GB 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 413850-001 2 Optical drives (include bez el) 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive 413698-001 413699-001 413700-001 413702-001 413701-101
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3.6 Miscell an eous (Not I llus trated) Ta b l e 3 - 5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information Description Spare P art Number 8-cell travel battery 367456-001 65-watt A C adapter 239704-001 External MultiBa y II 366143-001 External MultiBa y II power cable and stand 366144-001 HP Doc king Station 413267-001 HP Doc king Station 120 W A C adapter 391174-001 HP Doc king Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 380089-001 MultiBay 8X D VD-ROM Drive (f or use in Exter nal MultiBay II and HP Docking Station) 373314-001 MultiBay 24X D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive (f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II an d HP Doc king Station) 373315-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive (f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station) 375557-001 Nylon carrying case 325815-002
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 7 Po w e r c o r d s Fo r u s e i n : A ustralia 246959-011 Belgium, Europe, Finland, Germany , Greece, the Netherlands, Norwa y , P or tugal, Spain, and Sweden 246959-021 Brazil 246959-201 Canada, F rench Canada, La tin Amer ica, T aiwan, and the United States 246959-001 Denmark 246959-081 Hong K ong and the United Kingdom 246959-031 Israel 246959-BB1 Italy 246959-061 Japan 246959-291 K o rea 246959-AD1 Sweden 246959-A G1 Ta b l e 3 - 5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
3â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing screws; ref er to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â f or more inf orm ation on specifications and usage) 413705-001 â He x sock et HM5.0Ã9.0 screw loc k â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 shoulder screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 shoulder screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã7.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM1.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM1.5Ã3.5 screw â T orx8 T8M2.0Ã9.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.0Ã4.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.0Ã2.0 scre w Ta b l e 3 - 5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3 â2 9 3.7 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis tin g Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing Spare P art Number Description 239704-001 65-watt A C adapter 246959-001 P ower cord f or use in Canad a, F rench Canada, Latin America, T aiwan, and the United States 246959-011 P ower cord f or use in Austr alia 246959-021 P ower cord f or use in Be lgium, Europe, Finland, Ger many , Greece, the Netherlands, Norw a y , P or tugal, Spain, and Sweden 246959-031 P ower cord f or use in Hong K ong and the United Kingdom 246959-061 P ower cord f or use in Italy 246959-081 P ower cord f or use in Denmar k 246959-201 P ower cord f or use in Brazil 246959-291 P ower cord f or use in Japan 246959-AD1 P ower cord f or use in K orea 246959-A G1 P ower cord f or use in Sweden 246959-BB1 P ower cord f or use in Israel 325815-002 Nylon carr ying case 366143-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II 366144-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II po wer cab le and stand 367456-001 8-cell tra v el batter y 372772-001 6-cell, 4.8-Ah batter y 373314-001 MultiBa y 8X D VD-ROM Driv e (f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Docking Station)
3â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 373315-001 MultiBa y 24X D VD/CD-R W Co mbo Drive (f or use in External MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station) 375557-001 D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive (f or use in External MultiBay II and HP Doc king Station) 379799-001 Heat sink (i ncludes ther mal paste) 380089-001 HP Docking Statio n Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 391174-001 HP Docking Station 120 W A C adapter 393652-001 6-cell, 4.0-Ah batter y 398393-001 Bluetooth module (i ncludes Bluetooth module cable) 399440-001 Mini Card WW AN module 399441-001 Modem module 407254-001 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN Mi ni Card module f or use in the United States and Canada. Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â31 407254-002 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 407254-291 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN Mini Card module f or use in J apan. Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 407575-001 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mi ni Card module for use in the MO W 1 countries listed below . Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong P anama India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand P aragua y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 407575-002 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mi ni Card module for use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3 â3 3 407575-003 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below . China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407575-291 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mi ni Card module fo r use in Japan. 409280-004 802.11b/g GL WLAN Mini Ca rd module fo r use in the countr ies listed below . Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 413267-001 HP Docking Station 413667-001 System board f or use with def eatured computer models âGMâ 413668-001 System board or use with def eatured computer models âGML â 413669-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad 413670-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with finger print reader 413671-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with Mini Card WW AN module 413672-001 T op cov er for use with def eatured computer models (includes T ouchP ad) 413673-001 T op cov er for use with fu ll-f eatured computer models with pointing stick and fingerpr int reader (includes T ouchP ad) 413674-001 T op cov er for use with fu ll-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad and finger pr int reader (includes T ouchP ad) 413675-001 T op cov er for use with fu ll-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad but without finger print reader (includes T ouchP ad) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 413676-001 14.1-inch XGA, TFT displa y assembly f or use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 413677-001 15.0-inch XGA, TFT displa y assembly f or use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 413678-001 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT with Br ightVie w displa y assembly f or use with computer models witho ut WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 413679-001 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT displa y assemb ly f or use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 413680-001 Intel Celeron M 1.46-GHz processor (includes ther mal paste) 413681-001 Intel Celeron M 1.60-GHz processor (includes ther mal paste) 413682-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.66-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413683-001 Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413684-001 Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413685-001 Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413686-001 Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413687-001 Switch cov er for use wi th def eatured computer models (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 413688-001 Switch cov er for use with full-f eatured computer models (includes LED board and LED board cab le) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â35 413689-001 Base enclosure f or use wi th full-f eatured computer models 413690-001 Base enclosure f or use with def eatured computer models 413692-001 P ointing stick board (includes pointing stic k cab le) 413693-001 USB/audio board (includes USB/audio board cable) 413694-001 Serial connector modu le (includes ser ial connector board cable) 413695-001 Finger print reader board (includes finger print reader board cable) 413696-001 F an 413697-001 Speaker 413698-001 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 413699-001 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413700-001 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 413701-001 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 413702-001 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 413703-001 Cable Kit 413704-001 Plastics Kit 413706-001 Ther mal Grease Kit 413850-001 5400-r pm, 40-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413851-001 5400-r pm, 60-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413852-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413853-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413854-001 7200-r pm, 60-GB hard drive (includes frame) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 413896-001 Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz processor (includes ther mal paste) 414040-001 PC2-4200, 256-MB memor y module 414041-001 PC2-4200, 512-MB memor y module 414042-001 PC2-4200, 1024-MB memor y module 414044-001 PC2-5300, 256-MB memor y module 414045-001 PC2-5300, 512-MB memor y module 414046-001 PC2-5300, 10 24-MB memor y module 416038-001 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in the United States 416038-021 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Europe 416038-031 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in the United Kingdom 416038-041 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Ger many 416038-051 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in F rance 416038-061 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Italy 416038-071 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Spain 416038-081 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Denmar k 416038-091 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Norwa y Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 7 416038-111 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Switzerland 416038-121 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in F rench Canada 416038-131 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in P or tugal 416038-141 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in T ur ke y 416038-151 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Greece 416038-161 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Latin Amer ica 416038-171 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Saudi Arabia 416038-201 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Brazil 416038-211 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Hungar y 416038-221 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in the Czech Republic 416038-231 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Slov akia 416038-251 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Russia 416038-281 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Thailand 416038-291 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Japan Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 416038-A41 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Belgium 416038-AB1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in T aiwan 416038-AD1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in K orea 416038-BA1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Slovenia 416038-B71 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Sweden 416038-DD1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Israel 416039-001 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in the United States 416039-021 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Europe 416039-031 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in the United Kingdom 416039-041 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Ger many 416039-051 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in F rance 416039-061 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Italy 416039-071 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Spain 416039-081 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Denmar k Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 9 416039-091 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Norwa y 416039-111 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Switzerland 416039-121 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in F rench Canada 416039-131 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in P or tugal 416039-141 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in T ur ke y 416039-151 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Greece 416039-161 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Latin Amer ica 416039-171 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Saudi Arabia 416039-201 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Brazil 416039-211 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Hungar y 416039-221 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in the Czech Republic 416039-231 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Slov akia 416039-251 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Russia 416039-281 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Thailand Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 416039-291 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Japan 416039-A41 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Belgium 416039-AB1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in T aiwan 416039-AD1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in K orea 416039-BA1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Slovenia 416039-B71 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Sweden 416039-DD1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Israel 416165-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with Bluetooth and finger print reader 430687-001 Intel Core Duo T2300E (1.67-GHz) proc essor (includes ther mal paste) 430966-001 15.0-inch XGA, TFT displa y assembly f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wi reless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 430967-001 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT displa y assemb ly f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â1 4 Remo v al an d Repl a cement Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdri ver â Phillips P0 scre wdri v er â T orx8 scre wdriv er â 5.0-mm socket for system board scre wlocks â Flat-bladed scre wdri v er
4â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) away from the work area to pre v ent damage. Pl a s t i c Pa r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. Ca bl es and C onnec tors à CA UTION: When se rvi c ing the compute r , be sur e that cables ar e placed in their pr oper locations dur ing the r e as sembl y pr oces s. Impr oper cable placement can damage the compu ter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remo ved or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v enti ng Da mage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able driv es are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o pre vent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able driv e, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and be sure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, be sure that you are dischar ged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a v oid touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surf aces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri v es from any height onto an y surf ace. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri ve, or a diskette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.4 Pr e v entin g Elec trosta tic D ama ge Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vice parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice e xposed to electrostatic discharge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectanc y .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â5 4.5 P ac k a gin g and T ranspor tin g Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o a void hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro ved containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti v e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free w orkstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.6 W orkstation Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with appro v ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve field service tools, such as cutters, scre wdri vers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn off po wer and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment. 4.7 Groundin g E quip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap.
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â7 â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be ef fectiv e, the conducti ve strips must be w orn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti ve foam â Conducti ve tabletop w orkstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or box es â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials
4â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies T a ble 4-1 sho ws ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le ve ls generated by dif ferent activities. T a ble 4-2 lists the shielding protection pro vided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V oltage Le vels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubb le pac k from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Pr otection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â1 5 Remo v al an d Repl a cement Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo v al and replacement procedures. There are as many as 58 scre ws and screw locks, in 11 dif ferent sizes, that must be remov ed, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w and scre w lock size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix A, âScre w Listing, â for detailed information on scre w and scre w lock sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 Seri al Number Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 5 .2 Disassem bl y Seque nce Chart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Chart Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer f or Disassemb ly Batter y 0 5.4 Hard Driv e 2 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 1 loosened to remov e the hard drive 4 to remov e the hard dr iv e frame 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Bluetooth Module 0 5.7 External Memor y Module 1 loosened to remove the memor y/Mini Card module cov er 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module 2 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in the computer by the go v ernmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you replace the de vice and then receive a w arning message, remo v e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care through the Help and Suppor t Center . 5.9 Optical Driv e 1 to remov e the optical dr ive 2 to remov e the optical dr ive brac k et
5â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.10 Key b o a r d 2 5.11 Fa n 2 loosened 5.12 Heat Sink 4 loosened 5.13 Processor 1 loosened 5.14 RTC B a t t e r y 0 5.15 Internal Memor y Module 0 5.16 Mini Card WW AN Module 2 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you install a de vice and then receive a w arning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.17 Switch Co v er 2 5.18 Displa y Assembly 6 5.19 To p C o v e r 15 5.20 Speak er 1 5.21 Microphone 0 5.22 Modem Module 2 5.23 USB/A udio Board 1 5.24 System Board 1 screw 4 screw loc ks 5.25 Serial Connector Module 2 screw loc ks Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 .3 Preparing t h e Com pu ter f or Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remo v al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord.
5â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the battery b y follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. b . Slide the battery release latch on the right 1 and then the battery release latch on the left 2 to release the battery . c. Slide the battery 3 straight back and remov e it. R emo v ing the Battery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery . Battery Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation 6-cell, 4.8-Ah 6-cell, 4.0-Ah 372772-001 393652-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â7 5 .4 H ard Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. 3. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve co v er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the hard dri v e cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the hard dri ve cov er . â The hard dri ve co v er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. Har d Drive Spare P art Number Information 7200-r pm, 60-GB 413854-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB 5400-r pm, 80-GB 5400-r pm, 60-GB 5400-r pm, 40-GB 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 413850-001
5â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es R emo v ing the Har d Dr i ve C o v er
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â9 6. Loosen the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded hard dri v e retention scre w 1 . 7. Grasp the mylar tab 2 on the hard dri v e and slide the hard dri v e to the right 3 to disconnect it from the system board. 8. Remov e the hard dri ve 4 from the hard dri ve bay . R emo v ing the Har d Dr i ve
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 9. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 hard dri v e frame scre ws 1 from each side of the hard dri v e. 10. Lift the frame 2 straight up to remov e if from the hard dri ve. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i ve F rame Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â11 5. 5 C o m p u t e r Fe e t The computer feet are adhesi v e-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. R eplac ing the Com puter F eet
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .6 Bluetoot h Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ). 3. Slide the Bluetooth module 1 out of the clip in the hard dri v e compartment. 4. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable 2 from the module. R emo v ing the Bluet ooth Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Bluetooth module. Bluetooth Module Spare P art Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Bluetooth cable) 398393-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â13 5 .7 External Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory/Mini Card module cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the rear edge of the cov er 2 up and swing it to ward you. 5. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver . â The memory/Mini Card module cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. R emo v ing the Memory/Mini Car d Module Co v er
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â15 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 7. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 8. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with notches 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .8 M ini C ard WLAN Modul e Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P art Number Information 802.11a/b/g Intel Mini Card WLAN module f or use in the MO W 1 countries listed below: 407575-001 Antigua & Barbuda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K o ng Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand P aragua y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407575-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finand Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Phillippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â17 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in Japan. 407575-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409280-004 Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emir ates Ukraine 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f o r use in the United States and Canada. 407254-001 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN modul e f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407254-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finand Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Phillippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan. 407254-291 Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P art Number Information (Continued)
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ). 3. Position the computer with the front to ward you. 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the United States and Canada. 404253-001 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN modu le f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407253-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finand Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Phillippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan. 407253-291 Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P art Number Information (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â19 4. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WLAN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main antenna cables 1 from the module. 5. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WLAN module to the computer . 6. Remov e the Mini Card WLAN module 3 b y pulling the module from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card WLAN modules are designed with notches 4 to pre v ent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d WLAN Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WLAN module.
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .9 O ptical Driv e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ). 3. Position the computer with the right side to ward you. Optical Drive Spare P art Number Information 24X Max CD-R OM drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 413698-001 413699-001 413700-001 413702-001 413701-101
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â21 4. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.0Ã9.0 screw 1 that secures the optical dri ve to the computer . 5. Insert a flat-bladed dri v er into the slot 2 on the bottom of the computer and push the tab . 6. Remov e the optical dri ve 3 from the computer . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 7. If it is necessary to replace the optical dri ve brack et, remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the bracket to the optical dri v e. 8. Remov e the optical dri ve bracket 2 . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install an optical dri ve.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 3 5. 1 0 K e y b o a r d Ke yboar d Spare P ar t Number Information F or use with computer models with pointing stick and fingerpr int reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416038-A41 416038-201 416038-221 416038-081 416038-021 416038-051 416038-121 416038-041 416038-151 416038-211 416038-DD1 416038-BB1 416038-061 416038-291 416038-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416038-161 416038-091 416038-131 416038-251 416038-171 416038-231 416038-BA1 416038-071 416038-B71 416038-111 416038-AB1 416038-281 416038-141 416038-031 416038-001 P ointing stick boar d (not illustrated, includes pointing stic k cable) 413692-001
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ). Ke yboards (Continued) F or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416039-A41 416039-201 416039-221 416039-081 416039-021 416039-051 416039-121 416039-041 416039-151 416039-211 416039-DD1 416039-BB1 416039-061 416039-291 416039-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416039-161 416039-091 416039-131 416039-251 416039-171 416039-231 416039-BA1 416039-071 416039-B71 416039-111 416039-AB1 416039-281 416039-141 416039-031 416039-001 Ke yboar d Spare P ar t Number Information (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 5 3. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.0Ã9.0 scre ws that secure the ke yboard to the computer . R emo v ing the K ey boar d Scr ew s
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Open the computer as far as possible. 6. Slide the 4 ke yboard retaining latches to ward you. R eleasing the K ey board L atc hes
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 7 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard up and swing it to ward you until it rests on the palm rest. R eleasing the K ey board
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the ke yboard cable is attached and disconnect the ke yboard cable 2 . â Step 9 applies only to computer models with a pointing stick. 9. Release the ZIF connector 3 to which the pointing stick cable is attached and disconnect the pointing stick cable 4 . Disconnec ting the K e y boar d and P ointing S ti ck C able s 10. Remov e the ke yboard. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â2 9 5. 1 1 F a n 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. 4. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã7.0 scre ws 2 that secure the fan to the computer . 5. Remov e the fan 3 . R emo v ing the F an Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan. F an Spare P art Number Information F an 379799-001
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 2 Hea t Sink 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the fan ( Section 5.11 ). Heat Sink Spare P art Number Information Heat sink (includes ther mal paste) 379799-001 Ther mal Grease Kit (not illustrated) 413706-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â31 4. Loosen the four Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 shoulder scre ws 1 that secure the heat sink to the computer . 5. Lift the right side of the heat sink 2 to disengage it from the processor . 6. Slide the heat sink 3 to the right to remov e it. â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink from side to side to detach the heat sink from the processor . R emo v ing the Heat Sink
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the heat sink 1 and processor 2 each time the heat sink is remov ed. Thermal paste is included with all heat sink and processor spare part kits. Th erm a l P as te Lo c a ti on s Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â3 3 5. 1 3 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the fan ( Section 5.11 ). 4. Remov e the heat sink ( Section 5.12 ). Pr ocessor Spare P art Number Information Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300E (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001 430687-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 413682-001 Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.60-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.46-GHz processor 413896-001 413681-001 413680-001
5â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri v er to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-half turn counterclockwise until you hear a click. 6. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remov e it. â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle icon 4 embossed on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocesso r Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â35 5. 1 4 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Disconnect the R TC battery cable 1 from the system board. 4. Remov e the R TC battery 2 from the clip in the top cov er . R emo v ing the R T C Bat tery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery .
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 5 Inter n al Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation 1024 MB 512 MB 336579-001 336578-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 7 3. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 4. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle . 5. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with notches 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 6 Mini C ard WW AN Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Mini Car d WW AN Module Spare P art Number Information Mini Card WW AN module 399440-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 9 3. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WW AN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main antenna cables 1 from the module. 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WW AN module to the computer . 5. Remov e the Mini Card WW AN module 3 by pulling the module from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card WW AN modules are designed with notches 4 to pre v ent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d WW AN Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WW AN module.
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 7 Sw i t c h C ove r â Both switch cov er spare part kits include an LED board and LED board cable. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. Switch Co ver Spare P ar t Number Information F or use with full-f eatured computer models F or use with def eatured computer models 413688-001 413687-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â41 4. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.0Ã2.0 scre ws that secure the switch cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ve r Sc r e w s
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. T urn the computer display-side up with front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Disconnect the LED board cable 1 from the system board. 8. Insert a flat-bladed scre wdri v er into the four notches 2 on the front edge of the switch cov er 3 and lift up until the co ver disengages from the computer . 9. Remov e the switch co ver . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ve r Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â43 5 . 1 8 Displa y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory compartment co ver ( Section 5.7 ) and disconnect the wireless antenna cables from the Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ). 3. Remov e the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 4. Remov e the switch co ver ( Section 5.17 ) Displa y Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information Displa y assemb lies f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 430967-001 430966-001 Displa y assemb lies f or use with comp uter models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and c ab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 15.0-inch XGA, TFT 14.1-inch XGA, TFT 413679-001 413678-001 413677-001 413676-001
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the system board. 6. Remov e the WLAN antenna cables 2 from the routing channels 3 in the base enclosure. Disconnec ting the Displa y and W ir eles s Ca bles
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â4 5 7. Swing the display assembly into a partially closed position. 8. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. Ã CA UTION: Support the display a ssembl y w hen r emo v ing the fo llo w ing sc r e ws . Failur e to support the display as sembl y can r esult in damage to the displa y asse mbly and other com puter components . 9. Remov e the six T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 screws 1 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 10. Lift the display assembly 2 straight up and remov e it. R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the display assembly
5â4 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 9 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. T op Co ver Spare Part Number Information F or use with full-f eatured comput er models with pointing stic k and finger print reader 413673-001 F or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader 413674-001 F or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad but without finger print reader 413675-001 F or use with def eatured computer models 413672-001 Finger print reader board (not il lustrated; includes finger print reader board cable) 413695-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 7 3. Remov e the thirteen T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 screws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er S cr ew s, P ar t 1
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er S cr ew s, P ar t 2
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 9 6. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 R TC battery cable 2 T ouchPad cable 3 Fingerprint reader board cable 7. Remov e the microphone 4 from the hole in the top co ver . Disconnec ting the R T C Battery , T ouchP ad , and F ingerpr int R eader Boar d Ca bles
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Lift up the rear edge of the top cov er 1 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 9. Swing the top cov er 2 to ward you until the left and right sides of the top cov er disengage from the base enclosure. 10. Lift up on the left 3 and right sides 4 of the top cov er until the top cov er disengages from the base enclosure. R eleasing the T op Co ver 11. Lift the top cov er straight up until the front edge of the top cov er disengages from the base enclosure and remo v e the top cove r . Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â51 5. 2 0 S p e a ke r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) Speaker Spare P art Number Information Speak er 413697-001
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Disconnect the speaker cable from the system board. Disconnec ting the Speak er Cable
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 3 3. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.0Ã4.0 screw 1 that secures the speaker to the computer . 4. Remov e the speaker 2 from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the S peak er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the speaker .
5â5 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 2 1 M i c r o p h o n e â The microphone is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 )
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 2. Disconnect the microphone cable 1 from the system board and remov e the microphone 2 . R emo v ing the Mi c r ophone Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the microphone.
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .2 2 Modem Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) Modem Module Spare P art Number Information Modem module 399441-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 7 2. Remov e the modem connector 1 from the clip in the base enclosure. 3. Disconnect the modem cable 2 from the system board. R emo v ing the Modem Module C able
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 scre ws 1 that secure the modem module to the system board. 5. Lift the front edge of the modem module 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 6. Disconnect the modem cable 3 from the modem module. R emo v ing the Modem Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 9 5 .23 USB/Au dio Board 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) USB/A udio Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information USB/audio board (includes au dio board cable and USB board cable) 413693-001
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. 3. Release the ZIF connector to which the USB/audio board cable is connected and disconnect the USB/audio board cable 1 . 4. Remov e the Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre w 2 that secures the USB/audio board to the base enclosure. 5. Remov e the cable from the clips in the base enclosure. 6. Remov e the USB/audio board 3 . R emo v ing the U SB/Audi o Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the USB/audio board.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â61 5. 24 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, be sure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defecti ve system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.7 and Section 5.15 ) â Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ) â Processor ( Section 5.13 ) â Mini Card WW AN module ( Section 5.16 ) â Modem module and cable ( Section 5.22 ) 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth module ( Section 5.6 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Fan ( Section 5.11 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.12 ) System Boar d Spare P art Number Information F or use with full-f eatured computer models with Bluetooth and finger print reader F or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad F or use with full-f eatured computer models with finger print reader F or use with full-f eatured computer models with Mini Card WW AN module 416165-001 413669-001 413670-001 413671-001 F or use with def eatured computer models âGMâ F or use with def eatured computer models âGML â 413667-001 413668-001
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es g. R TC battery ( Section 5.14 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.20 ) l. Microphone ( Section 5.21 ) m. USB/audio board ( Section 5.23 ) 2. Disconnect the serial connector cable 1 and the Bluetooth cable 2 from the system board. 3. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 screw 3 that secures the system board to the base enclosure next to the RJ-11 connector . 4. Remov e the two HM5.0Ã9.0 scre w locks 4 on each side of the parallel connector . 5. Remov e the two HM5.0Ã9.0 scre w locks 5 on each side of the external monitor connectors. R emo v ing the S ys tem Boar d Scr ew s and Scr ew L ocks
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â63 6. Use the optical dri ve connector to lift the system board 1 until the po wer connector 2 is clear of the base enclosure. 7. Slide the system board 3 to the left at an angle and remov e it. R emo v ing the S ys tem Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the system board.
5â64 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .25 Serial C onnec tor Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth module ( Section 5.6 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Fan ( Section 5.11 ) g. Heat sink ( Section 5.12 ) h. R TC battery ( Section 5.14 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.20 ) l. USB/audio board ( Section 5.23 ) Serial Connector Module Spare P art Number Information Serial connector module (i ncludes ser ial connector module cable) 413694-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â6 5 2. Remov e the two HM5.0Ã9.0 scre w locks 1 on each side of the serial connector . 3. Lift the serial connector module and cable 2 out of the base enclosure. 4. Disconnect the serial connector module cable 3 from the system board. R emo v ing the Se r ial C onnect or Module Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the serial connector module.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â1 6 Spec ific ations This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height Width Depth 32.8 cm 26.7 cm 3.1 cm 12.91 10.51 1.22 W eight With 15.0-inch displa y , optical drive , and 6-cell batter y pack 2.86 kg 6.31 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A T emperature Operating (not writing to optical disc) Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep r ate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep r ate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT Display Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 30.0 cm 22.9 cm 38.1 cm 11.8 in 9.0 in 15.0 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 150 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.264 à 0.264 mm 1400 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 5.5 W Viewing angle /-35° horizontal, 15/-35° v er tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 30.0 cm 22.9 cm 38.1 cm 11.8 in 9.0 in 15.0 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 150 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.264 à 0.264 mm 1024 à 768 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 5.5 W Viewing angle /-35° horizontal, 15/-35° v er tical typical
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 14.1-inch, XGA, TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 28.5 cm 21.3 cm 35.8 cm 11.2 in 8.4 in 14.1 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.279 à 0.279 mm 1024 à 768 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4.0 W Viewing angle /-40° horizontal, 120/-40° v er tical typical
6â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 5 Har d Drives 100-GB* 80-GB* 60-GB* 40-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g Interface type SA T A SA T A SA T A SA T A T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 195,363,650 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 5400 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusi ons apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly .
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 6 Primary 6-cell, Li-Ion Batter y P ack Dimensions Height Width Depth We i g h t 2.00 cm 9.40 cm 13.40 cm 0.34 kg 0.79 in 3.70 in 5.28 in 0.75 lb Energ y V oltage Amp-hour capacity W att-hour capacity 11.1 V 4.4 Ah 48 Wh T emperature Operating Nonoperating 5°C to 45°C 0°C to 60°C 41°F to 113°F 32°F to 140°F
6â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 7 DV D - R O M D r i v e Applicable disc DV D - R O M ( DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 100 ms < 175 ms < 125 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 512 KB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 10 seconds Stop time < 3 seconds
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 8 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-RW , D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and mult ise ssi on) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD media D VD media Random Full strok e < 110 ms < 210 ms < 130 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 V r ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 8 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â11 Ta b l e 6 - 9 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 9 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â13 T able 6-10 CD-R OM Drive Applicable disc CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-RCD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-11 System DMA Hard ware DMA S ystem Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A vailab le f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â15 T ab le 6-12 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K e y or Microsoft Natural K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant ACâLink A udio Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controllerâ24C3 Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Disk ette dr ive IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time cloc k IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C2 Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI f ast Ether net Controller
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 Intel USB EHCI controllerâ24CD Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C4 Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C7 Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T ouchP ad IRQ13 Numer ic data processor IRQ14 Pri mar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. T ab le 6-12 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â17 T able 6-13 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x ) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Un used 020 - 021 I nterrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configur ation registers 025 - 03F Un used 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Un used 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 U nused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Un used 070 - 071 N MI enable/R TC 072 - 07F Un used 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 U nused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Un used 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x ) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Un used 170 - 177 S econdar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Primar y fixed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Un used 201 Joystic k (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Un used 220 - 22F Entertainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Un used 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t T able 6-13 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â19 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Un used 320 - 36F Un used 370 - 377 S econdar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 U nused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Serial por t (COM1/def ault) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-13 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-14 System Memory Map Size Memory Address System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memory 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super ex tended memor y 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Unused 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ1 A Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws and scre w locks used in the computer . All scre ws and scre w locks listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Scre w Kit, spare part number 378235-001.
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the hard driv e cov er to the computer (scre ws are captured on the cov er by C-clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 One scre w that secures the memor y/Min i Card module cov er to the computer (screw is captured on the co v e r b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.7 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ3 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WL AN to the computer (documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 scre ws that secure the optical drive brac k et to the optical drive (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ5 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WW AN to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Scr ew L ocation Ta b l e A - 2 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Spring-loaded Har d Drive Retention Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the hard driv e to the computer (screw is captured on the hard drive frame b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ7 Phillips P M3 . 0Ã4.0 Sc re w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 3 Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 4.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure the hard drive frame to the hard driv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Aâ8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocation Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the optical dr iv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ9 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the k eyboard to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ; left screw also secures optical driv e) mm
Aâ10 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ11 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Aâ12 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 13 screws that secure the top co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ13 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Aâ14 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã2 . 0 Sc re w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 5 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã2.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 2.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ15 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the f an to the co mputer (screws are captured on the f an assembly b y an O-clip; documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
Aâ16 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M2 .5Ã8. 0 Shoulder Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 Phillips PM2.5Ã8.0 Shoulder Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 8.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hea t sink to the computer ( scre ws are captured on the heat sink by C-clips; documented in Section 5.12 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ17 Phill ips P M2 .5Ã3. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 3.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the modem modu le to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
Aâ18 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati on Ta b l e A - 9 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the speak er to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ19 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati on Ta b l e A - 9 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the system bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) mm
Aâ20 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M1. 5Ã3 . 0 Scr ew L ocati on T ab le A-10 Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 3.0 mm 1.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the USB/audio board the computer (documented in Section 5.23 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ21 He x Soc k et HM5 . 0Ã9 . 0 Sc r ew L oc k Locati ons T ab le A-11 Hex Soc ket HM5.0Ã9.0 Screw Lock Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 6 9.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) 2 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) mm
Aâ2 2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g He x Soc k et HM5 . 0Ã9 . 0 Sc r ew L oc k Locati ons T ab le A-11 Hex Soc ket HM5.0Ã9.0 Screw Loc k (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 6 9.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screw loc ks that secure the ser ial connector board to the system board (documented in Section 5.25 ) mm
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ1 B Soft w ar e B ac k up an d Rec o v er y Back up HP Backup and Recov ery Manager pro vides se veral w ays to back up the system and to recov er optimal system functionality . â HP installed dri v ers, utilities, a nd applications can be copied to a CD or to a D VD using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â The computer must be connected to external po wer before you perform backup and recov ery procedures. Safeguarding Y our Da ta T o safeguard your documents, store personal f iles in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder .
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery B ac kin g Up t h e S y stem Using HP Backup and Restore Manager , you can â Back up specif ic files and folders. â Back up the entire system. â Back up modif ications since your last backup, using HP system restore points. â Schedule backups. Ba c king Up S pec ific Files or F old ers Y ou can back up specif ic files or folders to the hard dri ve, to an optional external hard dri ve, or to discs. â This process will take se veral minutes, depending on the f ile size and the speed of the computer . T o back up specific f iles or folders: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up individual f iles and folders , and then click Next . The Backup W izard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Backup selected f iles fr om most common locations (Recommended) . â or â Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access adv anced f iltering techniques. 7. Click Next. 8. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Bac k up and R eco ve ry Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ3 B ac kin g Up t h e Entire Hard Driv e When you perform a complete backup of the hard dri v e, you are sa ving the full factory image, including the W indo ws operating system, software applications, and all personal f iles and folders. â A copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve, on a netw ork dri v e, or on recov ery discs that you create. â This process may take o v er an hour , depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. T o back up your entire hard driv e: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up entire hard dri ve , and then click Next . The âBack up entire hard diskâ page opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select the location for the backup f iles, and then click Next . 7. Select the Protect data access with passw ord check box, and type your password in the Passw ord and Conf irm boxes. â This step is optional. If you do not want to password-protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with passw ord check box. 8. Click Next. 9. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery Ba c king U p Modifications M ad e to the S y ste m When you back up modif ications since your last backup, you are creating system recov ery points. This allo ws you to sav e a snapshot of your hard dri v e at a specific point in time. Y ou can then recov er back to that point if you w ant to re verse subsequent changes made to your system. â The f irst system recov ery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the f irst time you perform a backup. Subsequent recov ery points mak e a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recov ery points â Before you add or extensi vely modify software or hardw are. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . â Recov ering to an earlier reco very point does not af fect data f iles or e-mails created since that recov ery point. After you create a recov ery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recov ery points. Y ou can schedule recovery points for a specif ic time or e vent in your system. T o create and schedule a system recovery point: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Create or manage Reco very P oints , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Point Managerâ page opens. 5. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Bac k up and R eco ve ry Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ5 Sc heduling Ba c k ups T o schedule backups: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler . The âBackup Schedulerâ page opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Schedule system recov ery points at specif ic interv als (no w , daily , weekly , or monthly) or at specific e vents, such as at system start or when you dock to an optional docking station (select computer models only), by clicking one of the a v ailable options. Click Next to further def ine the settings. A summary of your system recov ery point settings is displayed. 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Rec o v e r y HP Backup and Recov ery Manager analyzes the hard dri ve and creates a dedicated hard dri v e rec ov ery partition on the hard dri v e large enough to store a cop y of the full factory image. Y ou can choose whether you want to store that cop y on the recov ery partition, on another dri v e, or on external reco v ery discs. â Before using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager , try repairing the system by running Microsoft W indows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support , and then search for âSystem Restore. â
Bâ6 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery HP Backup and Recov ery Manager allo ws you to â Cr eate reco very discs (highly r ecommended). The recov ery discs are used to start up your computer and to recov er the full f actory image (operating system and software) in case of system f ailure or instability . â If you do not ha ve a CD or D VD burner , a copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve or on a network dri ve. â P erf orm a r ecov ery . Y ou can perform a full system recovery or recov er important f iles from the recovery partition on the hard dri ve, from another dri ve, or from reco very discs that you create. Creating Reco v er y Disc s (Hi ghly Recommended) After setting up the computer for the f irst time, you can create a set of recov ery discs of the full factory image, using Reco very Media Creator in the HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . The recov ery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recov er the operating system and softwa re to factory settings in case of system failure or instability . Ã CA UTION: After y ou cr eate the r eco v ery discs, y ou can incr ease the amount of a v ailable space on the har d dri v e b y deleting the r e co v ery partition . Ho w e v er , doing this is n o t r ecommended . If y ou delete this partition , y ou w ill los e an y inf ormati on that is on the partition . â Only one set of recov ery discs can be created for this computer .
So ft w ar e Bac k up and R eco ve ry Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ7 Before creating recov ery discs: â Obtain high-quality CD-R, D VD-R, or D VD R media, purchased separately . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Number each disc before inserti ng it into the optical dri v e of the computer . â If necessary , you can cancel Recov ery Media Creator before you ha ve f inished creating the recov ery discs. The next time you open Recov ery Media Creator , you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left of f. T o create a set of recovery discs: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory softwar e recov ery CDs or D VDs to r ecover the system (Highly r ecommended) , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Media Creatorâ page opens. 4. Click Next. 5. Click Write to CD/D VD , and then click Next . 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Pe r f o r m i n g a R e c o v e r y P erforming a Reco very from t he Reco v er y Disc s T o perform a recovery from the reco very discs: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Insert the f irst recov ery disc into the optical dri v e and restart the computer . 3. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ8 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery P erforming a Reco v er y from t he H ard Driv e There are 2 ways to initiate a reco v ery from the hard dri ve: â From within W indows. â From the recov ery partition. Initia ting a Reco v er y in Win do ws T o initiate a recovery in W indows: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recov er important f iles or the entir e system , and then click Next . 5. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . â If you choose to recov er the system, the computer restarts and recov ery be gins. 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Initia ting a Reco v er y from th e Hard Driv e Reco v er y P artition T o initiate a recovery from the hard dri ve reco very partition: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Restart the computer , and then press f11 before the W indows operating system loads. 3. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ1 C Dis pl a y C ompon ent Recy c lin g à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . à CA UTION: The pr ocedure s in this appendi x can r esult in damage to displa y components . T he only compo nents intended f or r ecy c ling purpo ses ar e the liquid c rys tal displa y (L CD) panel and the backlight . Car eful handling should be e x er c ised w hen r emo v ing these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the backlight in the display assembly that might require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Câ2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the liquid crystal display (LCD) panel 2. â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another .
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all scre w covers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Sc re w Co v er s and Sc r e w s
Câ4 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Dis play Bez el
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ5 4. Disconnect all display panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remo ve the in verter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv erter
Câ6 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 5. Remov e all scre ws 1 that secure the display panel assembly to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the display panel assembly 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the Dis play P anel As sembl y
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ7 7. T urn the display panel assembly upside do wn. 8. Remov e all scre ws that secure the display panel frame to the display panel. R emo v ing the Dis play P anel F r ame Sc r ew s
Câ8 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the sides of the display panel to the display panel frame. 10. Remov e the display panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v ing the Dis play F rame
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ9 11. Remov e the scre ws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the display panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight co ver . R emo v ing the Bac klight C o v er
Câ10 Main tenance and Se rvi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 14. T urn the display panel right-side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the display panel. R eleasing the Bac klight C able s
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ11 16. T urn the display panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the display panel. R emo v ing the Bac klight F r ame
Câ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v ing the Bac klight
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the scre ws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the display rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the display rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the display rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P a nel
Câ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P a nel 24. Recycle the LCD panel and backlight.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ1 D Co nnec tor P in As sig nmen ts Ta b l e D - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, r ight channel
Dâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 2 A udio-In (Micr ophone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e D - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ3 Ta b l e D - 4 Serial Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Carrier detect 6 Data set ready 2 Receiv e data 7 Ready to send 3 T r ansmit data 8 Clear to send 4 Data terminal ready 9 Ring indicator 5G r o u n d
Dâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 5 P arallel P or t Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Strobe 14 A uto linef e ed 2 Data bit 0 15 Error 3 Data bit 1 16 Initializ e printer 4 Data bit 2 17 Select in 5 Data bit 3 18 Ground 6 Data bit 4 19 Ground 7 Data bit 5 20 Ground 8 Data bit 6 21 Ground 9 Data bit 7 22 Ground 10 Ackno wledge 23 Ground 11 Busy 24 Ground 12 P aper end 25 Ground 13 Select
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ5 Ta b l e D - 6 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color g round
Dâ6 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 7 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Hor izontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B clock 8 Ground analog
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ7 Ta b l e D - 8 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Un used 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Dâ8 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 9 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T r ansmit 5 Unused 2 T r ansmit â 6 Receive â 3 Receiv e 7 Unused 4 Un used 8 Unused
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ1 E P o w er C ord Set Requirem ents 3-Con duc tor P o w er Cord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Eâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Co rd Set R equirements Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OVE 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance U TE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J a panese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Eâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Republic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J a panese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance co upler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â9 A AC adapter, spare part number 3â26 , 3â29 arrow keys 1â15 audio troubleshooting 2â21 audio-in jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 audio-out jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 B base enclosure, spare part numbers 3â11 , 3â35 battery removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â29 , 3â30 , 5â6 battery bay 1â13, 1â20 battery light 1â7 battery pack specifications 6â7 battery release latch 1â20 Bluetooth cable, illustrated 3â23 Bluetooth module removal 5â12 spare part number 3â21, 3â30 , 5â12 bottom components 1â20 C Cable Kit contents 3â23 spare part number 3â23, 3â35 cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â15 caps lock light 1â19 carrying case, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 CD-ROM drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â13 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â20 front 1â6 keyboard 1â12, 1â14
Inde xâ2 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x left-side 1â10 rear 1â10 right-side 1â8 top 1â16, 1â18 computer feet illustrated 3â22 locations 5â11 Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â5 Diagnostics Menu 2â4 File Menu 2â2 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â3 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Dâ2 audio-out Dâ1 external monitor Dâ6 headphone Dâ1 microphone Dâ2 modem Dâ7 monitor Dâ6 network Dâ8 parallel Dâ4 RJ-11 Dâ7 RJ-45 Dâ8 serial Dâ3 S-Video-out Dâ5 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Dâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â22 Digital Media Slot 1â7 Digital Media Slot light 1â7 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â19 precautions 4â3 display assembly removal 5â43 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â34 , 3â40 , 5â43 specifications 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 display component recycling Câ1 display lid switch 1â17 display release button 1â7 docking connector 1â20 docking station AC adapter spare part number 3â26, 3â30 Docking Station, HP spare part number 3â26, 3â33 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â30 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â9
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ3 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â11 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive, spare part number 3â26, 3â30 DVD-ROM drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â29 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â8 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 exhaust vents 1â11 expansion product troubleshooting 2â14 ExpressCard slot 1â11 ExpressCard slot space saver, illustrated 3â22 external monitor port location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ6 External MultiBay II power cable and stand, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 External MultiBay II, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 F f1 to f12 keys 1â15 fan removal 5â29 spare part number 3â7 , 3â35 , 5â29 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â22 locations 5â11 fingerprint reader board cable, disconnection 5â49 fingerprint reader board, spare part number 3â9, 3â35 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â21, 2â22 no network/modem connection 2â26 no OS loading 2â15 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â19 no OS loading from hard drive 2â16, 2â17, 2â18 no OS loading from optical drive 2â20 no power 2â8, 2â10, 2â11 no video 2â12, 2â13 nonfunctioning device 2â23 nonfunctioning docking device 2â14 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â24 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â25
Inde xâ4 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x fn key 1â15 front components 1â6 G grounding equipment and methods 4â6 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â16 precautions 4â3 removal 5â7 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â25 , 3â35 , 5â7 specifications 6â6 hard drive bay 1â21 hard drive cover illustrated 3â22 removal 5â7 hard drive frame, removal 5â10 headphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 heat sink removal 5â30 spare part number 3â7, 3â30 , 5â30 HP Docking Station AC adapter, spare part number 3â26 , 3â30 HP Docking Station, spare part number 3â26, 3â33 I I/O address specifications 6â17 interrupt specifications 6â15 K keyboard removal 5â23, 5â24 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â7 , 3â36 , 3â37 , 3â38 , 3â39 , 3â40 , 5â23 , 5â24 troubleshooting 2â24 keyboard components 1â12, 1â14 keypad keys 1â15 L left-side components 1â10 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â24 memory map specifications 6â20 memory module removal 5â13, 5â36 spare part numbers 3â19, 3â36 , 5â13 , 5â36 memory/Mini Card module compartment 1â21 memory/Mini Card module cover illustrated 3â22 removal 5â14 microphone illustrated 3â22 release 5â49 microphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ5 Mini Card compartment 1â21 Mini Card WLAN module removal 5â16 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â15 , 3â17 , 3â19 , 5â16 Mini Card WWAN module removal 5â38 spare part number 3â11, 3â30 , 5â38 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit (for use with docking device), spare part number 3â26, 3â30 modem cable illustrated 3â23 removal 5â57 modem jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ7 modem module removal 5â56 spare part number 3â11, 3â30 , 5â56 troubleshooting 2â26 monitor port location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ6 N network jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ8 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â14, 2â23 num lock key 1â15 num lock light 1â19 O optical drive location 1â9 OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â29 , 3â30 , 5â20 specifications 6â8, 6â9, 6â11 , 6â13 optical drive bracket, removal 5â22 P packing precautions 4â5 parallel port location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ4 password clearing 1â4 PC Card slot 1â11 PC Card slot space saver 3â22 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit contents 3â22 spare part number 3â11, 3â22 , 3â35 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 pointing stick 1â19 pointing stick board, spare part number 3â7, 3â35 , 5â23 pointing stick buttons 1â19 power button 1â16
Inde xâ6 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x power connector 1â13 power cord set requirements Eâ2 spare part numbers 3â27, 3â29 power light 1â6 , 1â19 power management features 1â5 power, troubleshooting 2â8 processor removal 5â33 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â34 , 3â36 , 3â40 , 5â33 R rear components 1â10 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ7 RJ-45 jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ8 RTC battery illustrated 3â22 removal 5â35 RTC battery cable, disconnection 5â49 S Screw Kit contents Aâ1 spare part number 3â28, Aâ1 screw listing Aâ1, Bâ1 security cable slot 1â13 serial connector module removal 5â64 spare part number 3â19, 3â35 , 5â64 serial connector module cable, illustrated 3â23 serial number 3â1, 5â2 serial port location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ3 service considerations 4â2 speaker location 1â7 removal 5â51 spare part number 3â11, 3â35 , 5â51 speaker cable, disconnection 5â52 specifications battery pack 6â7 CD-ROM drive 6â13 computer 6â1 display 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 6â9 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive 6â11 DVD-ROM drive 6â8 hard drive 6â6 I/O addresses 6â17 interrupts 6â15 memory map 6â20
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ7 optical drive 6â8, 6â9, 6â11 , 6â13 system DMA 6â14 static shielding materials 4â8 stringent security 1â4 S-Video-out jack location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ5 switch cover removal 5â40 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â34 , 5â40 system board removal 5â61 spare part numbers 3â11, 3â33 , 3â40 , 5â61 system DMA 6â14 system memory map 6â20 T Thermal Grease Kit, spare part number 3â7, 3â35, 5â30 thermal paste, replacement 5â32 tools required 4â1 top components 1â16, 1â18 top cover removal 5â46 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â33 , 5â46 TouchPad 1â19 TouchPad cable disconnection 5â49 illustrated 3â23 TouchPad left/right buttons 1â19 TouchPad scroll zone 1â19 transporting precautions 4â5 travel battery, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â1 expansion product 2â14 flowcharts 2â6 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â14 , 2â23 OS loading 2â15 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 power 2â8 video 2â12 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â9, 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 unknown password 1â4 USB/audio board removal 5â59 spare part number 3â11, 3â35 , 5â59 USB/audio board cable, illustrated 3â23
Inde xâ8 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x V video troubleshooting 2â12 volume buttons 1â17 W Windows applications key 1â15 Windows logo key 1â15 wireless button 1â17 wireless light 1â6, 1â17 WLAN Mini Card module spare part numbers 3â30, 3â31 , 3â32 , 3â33 workstation precautions 4â6
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-P ackard Dev elopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel, Celeron, and Core are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used by He wlett-Packard Company under licen se. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S erv ice Gui de HP Compaq nc6 300 Notebook PC HP Co mpaq nx6 3 00 Notebook P C F irst E dition: June 2006 Doc ument P art Number : 415 7 9 3-001
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide iii Cont e nt s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â22 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the System Configuration Menu. . . . 2â5 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6
i v Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â22 3.4 Cable Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â23 3.5 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â24 3.6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â26 3.7 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â29 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6
Cont en ts Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â5 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.6 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â12 5.7 External Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â16 5.9 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â20 5.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â23 5.11 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â29 5.12 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â30 5.13 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â33 5.14 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â35 5.15 Internal Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â36 5.16 Mini Card WWAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â38 5.17 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â40 5.18 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â43 5.19 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â46 5.20 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â51 5.21 Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â54 5.22 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â56 5.23 USB/Audio Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â59 5.24 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â61 5.25 Serial Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â64
v i Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 6 Specifications A Screw Listing B Software Backup and Recovery C Display Component Recycling D Connector Pin Assignments E Power Cord Set Requirements Index
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Compaq nc6300 Notebook PC and HP Compaq nx6300 Notebook PC of fer adv anced modularity , Intel® Core⢠Duo, Intel Core Solo, and Celeron® M processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP Co mpaq nc6 300 Not ebook PC and HP Co mpaq nx6 3 00 Notebook P C
1â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1.1 F e a t u r e s â Numerous references are made throughout this Maintenance and Service Guide to âfull-featuredâ and âdefeaturedâ units. A computer model is considered to be full-featured if it has 4 Uni v ersal Serial Bus ports, an ExpressCard slot, and the follo wing components: â V olume control b uttons â Info Center b utton â Digital Media Slot â Serial port â Parallel port â S-V ideo-out jack â Docking connector A computer model is considered to be defeatured if it has only 2 Uni v ersal Serial Bus ports and none of the components in the preceding list. â The follo wing processors are a v ailable, v arying b y computer model: â Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz), T2500 (2.00-GHz), T2400 (1.83-GHz), or T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor â Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.66-GHz) processor â Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz, 1.60-GHz, or 1.46-GHz processor â The follo wing displays are a v ailable, v arying by computer model: â 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT (1400 Ã 1050) with o ver 16.8 million colors â 15.0-inch or 14.1-inch, XGA, TFT (1280 Ã 800) with ov er 16.8 million colors â 100-, 80-, 60-, and 40-GB high-capacity hard dri v e, v arying by computer model
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â3 â 256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 400 MHz and 533 MHz, expandable to 2.0 GB â Microsoft® W indows® XP Professional â Full-size W indows k e yboard with embedded numeric ke ypad â Pointing stick (select computer models only) and T ouchP ad pointing de vices â Integrated 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack â Integrated wireless support for Mini PCI IEEE 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g W ireless LAN (WLAN) de vice â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card broadband wireless wide area network (WW AN) de vice â Support for one optional T ype I, T ype II, or T ype III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card, v arying b y computer model â External 65-watt A C adapter with 3-wire po wer cord, v arying by computer model â 6-cell Li-Ion battery â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical dri v es: â CD-R OM dri ve â D VD-R OM dri ve â D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Dri ve â D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri ve â Connectors: â Audio-out (headphone) â Audio-in (microphone) â Uni versal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0 (two to four , varying by computer model) â Po wer
1â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion â External monitor â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â IEEE 1394 â Accessory battery â Digital Media Slot (select computer models only) â S-V ideo-out (select computer models only) â Docking connector (select computer models only) 1 .2 R eset tin g t he C omp uter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w the steps belo w to reset the password. These steps also clear CMOS. â The follo wing steps will not clear an unkno wn password if the stringent security option has been enabled in the BIOS. If stringent security is enabled, the system board must be replaced to reset an unkno wn password. Refer to Section 5.24, âSystem Board, â for more information on replacing the system board. Before replacing the system board, perform the steps belo w to make sure stringent security has been properly enabled. Enabling stringent security provides enhanced protection for the po wer -on password and administrator passw ord and other forms of po wer -on authorization. Stringent security is enabled/disabled by accessing the P assword Options menu in the Computer Setup utility . Refer to Section 2.1, âComputer Setup, â for more information. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information).Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.14, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery).
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â5 2. W a it approximately 5 minutes. 3. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 4. Connect A C power to the computer . Do not reinsert any batteries at this time. 5. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha v e been cleared. 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e po wer . The computer supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le v el of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F r ont Components Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice has been enabled. 2P o w e r l i g h t â Green: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An A C adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is o ff or in hiber nation.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â7 3 Batter y light â Amber : A batter y is charging. â Green: A batter y is close to full charge capacity . â Blinking amber : A batter y that is the only av ailable po wer source has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking more quickly . â Off: If the computer is connected to an e xter nal pow er source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not connected to an e xternal power source, the light is tur ned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 4 Drive light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 5 Stereo speakers (2) Produce system sound. 6 Displa y release latch Opens the computer . 7 Digital Media Slot (select computer models only) Suppor ts 7 optional digital memor y card f or mats: SD (Secure Digital) Memor y Card, MultiMediaCard, Memor y Stick, Memory Stick Pro , Memor y Stic k Duo (with adapter), Smar tMedia cards, and xD-Picture Card. 8 Digital Media Slot light (select computer models only) On: A digital memor y card is being accessed. Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the right side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-2. R igh t -Si de Com ponents
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â9 Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 USB por ts (2; select computer models only) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connect an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e xternal pow er source. 2 1394 por t Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , digital camera, or digital camcorder . 3 RJ-11 (modem) jack Conn ects the modem cab le. 4 Optical drive Suppor ts an opti cal disc. The type of optical drive v ar ies by model. 5 Serial por t (select computer models only) Connects an optional serial device .
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the left side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-3. Left -Side Components
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â11 Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional networ k cab le. 2 Exter nal monitor por t Connects an optional V GA e xter nal monitor or projector . 3 Exhaust v ent Pro vides airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only on a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow another hard surf ace, such as an adjoining optional printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . 4 USB por ts (2) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cab le, or connect an optional External MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e xternal pow er source. 5A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Connect optional headphones or pow ered stereo speake rs. Also connects the audio function of an audio/v ideo de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. 6A u d i o - i n (microphone) jack Connects an optional monaural microphone. 7 PC Card slot Suppor ts optional T ype I, T ype II, or T ype III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. Some computer models ma y be shipped with a smar t card reader instead. 8 ExpressCard slot (select computer models only) Suppor ts optional ExpressCard/54 or ExpressCard/34 cards.
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-4. Re ar P a n el Co m po n e nt s
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â13 T able 1-4 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . Ã The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but ma y not pre v ent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y . 3 P ower connector Connects an A C adapter or an optional pow er adapter . 4 P arallel por t (select computer models only) Connects an optional parallel de vice, such as an e xtern al disk ette drive or a printer . 5S - V i d e o - o u t j a c k (select computer models only) Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card.
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K ey board C ompone nts
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â15 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboar d Components Item Component Function 1 fn ke y Ex ecutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function ke y or the esc key . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and turns on the caps loc k light. 3 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erform system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key , s ever al ke ys and b uttons perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 4 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and turns on the num loc k light. 5 K eypad ke ys (15) In Windows , can be used like the ke ys on an e xter nal numeric k eypad. 6 Arrow k e ys Mov es the cursor around the screen. 7W i n d o w s applications ke y In Windows , displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 8 Windows logo k e y In Window s , displa ys the Windows Star t menu.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T a ble 1-6. T op Components , P ar t 1 T able 1-6 T op Components, Part 1 Item Component Function 1 P ower b utton When the computer is: â Off , press to turn on the computer . â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standb y , briefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. If the system has st opped responding and Windows shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold f or 5 seconds to tur n off the computer .
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â17 2 Displa y lid s witch â If the computer is closed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the computer is opened while in standby , tur ns on the computer (resumes from standby). 3 Inf o Center b utton (select computer models only) Enables y o u to vie w a list of commonly used software solutions . 4 Wireless button T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off , but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 5 Presentation mode b utton (select computer models only) T ur ns on Presentation mode. 6 V olume mute b utton (select computer models only) Mutes or restores speake r vo lume. 7 V olume down b utton (select computer models only) Decreases speake r volume . 8 V olume up button (select computer models only) Increases speake r volume . T able 1-6 T op Components, P ar t 1 (Continued) Item Component Function
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are continued belo w and described in T able 1-7. T op Components , P ar t 2
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â19 T able 1-7 T op Components, Part 2 Item Component Function 1P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is tur ned on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby , â Blinking rapidly: An A C adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is off . 2 Wireless light On: An integr ated wireless de vice has been tur ned on. 3 Caps lock light On: caps lock is on. 4 Num loc k light On: num lock or the numeric ke ypad is on. 5 Microphone (select computer models only) Records sound. 6 P ointing stick (select computer models only) Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 7 Left/right pointing stick b uttons (select computer models only) Function lik e the left and ri ght b uttons on an e xternal mouse. 8 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Ca n be set to perf orm other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic k ing. 9 Left/right T ouchP ad bu tt o n s Function lik e the left and ri ght b uttons on an e xternal mouse. 10 T ouchP ad scroll zone Scrolls up or down. 11 Finger print reader (select computer models only) Allows a fingerpr int logon to Windows instead of using a pass word.
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-8. Bot tom Component s Ta b l e 1 - 8 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds the batter y . 2 Batter y release latches (2) Relea ses the batter y from the batter y ba y . 3 Docking connector (select computer models only) Connects the computer to an optional doc king de vice. 4 Accessor y batter y connector (select computer models only) Connects an optional HP Ultra-Capacity Batter y or HP Extended Lif e Batter y .
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â21 5 Memor y module compar tment Mini Card compar tment Contains 2 memor y slots that suppor t replaceable memory modules. The number of preinstalled memor y modules v aries by computer model. Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice. Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in the computer by the go v er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in y our countr y . If you replace the de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care through the Help and Suppor t Center . 6 Hard drive ba y Holds the primar y hard dr iv e. 7 Exhaust v ents Provides airflo w to cool intern al components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only on a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow another hard surf ace, such as an adjoining optional printer , or a soft surf ace , such as pillows or thic k r ugs or clothing, to blo ck ai r fl ow . Ta b l e 1 - 8 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov ervie w of key parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Audio â Display â Hard dri v e â Intel Dual Core, Solo Core, and Celeron M processors â K e yboard and T ouchP ad â Memory module â Mini Card module â PC Card à CA UTION: T o pr operl y ventilate the com puter , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) c lear ance on the left and r igh t sides o f the compu ter . The computer uses an electric fan for v entilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected b y high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char gi ng, and software. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARN ING: Only author iz ed tec hnic ians trained b y HP should repair this equipmen t . All tr ouble shooting and r epair pr ocedur es ar e detailed to allo w onl y subas sembl y-/module -lev el r epair . Becaus e of the comple x ity of the indi v idual boar ds and suba ssembli es , do not attempt to mak e repair s at the component le vel or modif icati ons to an y printed w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w ir ing boar d modif icati on may v oid an y war ranty or e x c hange allo wance s. 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not w orking or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in W indows. Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , Diagnostics, or System Configuration menus: 1. T urn on or restart the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, use the cursor control keys to na vigate to the System Conf iguration menu. â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc .
2â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting 2. Select the File , Security , Diagnostics, or System Conf iguration menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the computer: â Select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Restore defaults, and then press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press f10 . Selecti ng fr om the F ile Me nu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Vie w identification inf or mation about the computer , processor , memor y and cache size, and system ROM. â Vie w BIOS re vision, ke yboard controller v ersion, and batter y pack serial number inf ormation.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â3 Selec ting from the Sec urity Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Setup P assword Enter , change , or delete an Setup pass word. P ower-On P ass word Enter , change, or delete a pow er-on pass word. P assw ord Options (P assw ord options can be selected only when a power-on pass word has been set.) Enable/disab le: â Stringent secur ity . â Requirement of pass word on restar t. DriveLoc k P ass words Enable/disab le Dr iveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Smar t Card Secur ity Enable/disab le smar t card powe r-on suppor t. â A setup password must be established to use this feature. TPM Embedded Security Enable/disab le: â Embedded security device state . â P ower-on authenti cation suppor t. â A utomatic DriveLoc k suppor t. System IDs Estab lish: â Notebook asset trac king number . â Notebook ownership tags . Disk Sanitizer Estab lish f ast, optimum, or custom settings f or disk sanitizing. *Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 driv es.
2â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Selec ting fr om t he Diagnos tics Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Diagnostics Men u Select T o Do This HDD Self-T est Options Run a quick co mprehensiv e self test on hard drives in the system that suppor t the test f eatures. Memor y Check Run a quick co mprehensiv e test on system memor y on the f ollowing categories: â W alking 0s â W alking 1s â High Address line testing â Alter nate P atter n testing
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â5 Selec tin g fr om t he S ystem Config uration Menu Ta b l e 2 - 4 System Configuration Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Options Enable/disab le Mult iBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can includ e most bootab le de vices and media in the system. De vice Configurations Enable/disable: â Swap Fn / Ctrl k eys. â USB legacy suppor t. â BIOS DMA data transf ers. â F an Alwa ys on while on A C P ower . â Data Ex ecution Pre v ention. â LAN P ower sa v e . Built-In De vice Options Enable/disab le: â Embedded WLAN De vice Radio . â Embedded Bluetooth De vice Radio . â LAN/WLAN Switching. â W ake on LAN from Off . P or t Options Enable/disab le: â USB P or t. â 1394 P or t. â CardBus Slot.
2â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting 2.2 T roubl eshooting Flo wc har ts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T r oubleshooting Flowc har ts Overview Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roub leshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicab le)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing Deviceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â7 Flo wc h art 2. 1âInitial T roub leshootin g Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K e yboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.2âN o P o w er , P art 1 1. Reset the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Be sure the AC power source is active. 3. Be sure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r up on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r up in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r up on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select computer models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select computer models, the computer can be reset using th e standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power swit ch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â9 Flo wc h art 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r on ? Check batter y pack by recharging it, moving it to another computer , Po we r on ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r on ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.4âN o P o w er , P art 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sou rc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r LE D on? Po we r ou tl e t active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â11 Flowc h ar t 2.5 âN o P ow e r , P ar t 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.6âN o Video, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and computer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking Device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to en su re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â13 Flo wc h art 2.7âN o Video, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting F lo wch a rt 2 . 8 â N o n fu nct i o n i ng Do ck ing De v i c e (i f appl icable) Y N Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. N T est replacement docking device with new computer . Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Replace docking device. Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â15 Flo wc h art 2.9âN o Opera ting S y stem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive. â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 0âNo OS Loa ding , H ard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the Setup Utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order .
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â17 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o OS L oa di n g , H ard Drive, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 2âNo OS Loa ding , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â19 Flo wc h art 2. 1 3âNo OS Loa ding , Disk et te Driv e Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. 1. Replace diskette drive. 2. Replace system board. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the Setup Utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup Utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 4âNo OS Loa ding , O ptical Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup Utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â21 Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 5 âNo Au dio, P ar t 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Replace the docking device.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 6âNo Au dio, P art 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc h art 2. 1 7âN onfunc tioning D e vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 8âNonfun c tioning K e yboard Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc h art 2. 1 9âNonfunc tioning P oin ting De vic e Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc har t 2.20âNo N et w ork/Modem Conn ectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace the NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a talog This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 S erial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
3â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Displa y assemblies f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 430967-001 430966-001 Display assemb lies for use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 15.0-inch XGA, TFT 14.1-inch XGA, TFT 413679-001 413678-001 413677-001 413676-001 2 Switch co ver s (include LED board and LED board cable) F or use with full-f eatured computer models F or use with def eatured computer models 413688-001 413687-001
3â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 K eyboar ds F or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger pr int reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416039-A41 416039-201 416039-221 416039-081 416039-021 416039-051 416039-121 416039-041 416039-151 416039-211 416039-DD1 416039-BB1 416039-061 416039-291 416039-AD1 416039-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416039-091 416039-131 416039-251 416039-171 416039-231 416039-BA1 416039-071 416039-B71 416039-111 416039-AB1 416039-281 416039-141 416039-031 416039-001
3â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 K eyboar ds (Continued) F or use with computer models with po inting stic k and finger print reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416038-A41 416038-201 416038-221 416038-081 416038-021 416038-051 416038-121 416038-041 416038-151 416038-211 416038-DD1 416038-BB1 416038-061 416038-291 416038-AD1 416038-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416038-091 416038-131 416038-251 416038-171 416038-231 416038-BA1 416038-071 416038-B71 416038-111 416038-AB1 416038-281 416038-141 416038-031 416038-001 P ointing stick boar d (not illustrated, includes pointing stic k cable) 413692-001 4 Fan 413696-001 5 Heat sink (includes thermal paste) 379799-001 Thermal Grease Kit (not illustrated) 413706-001
3â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 6 Pr ocessors (include thermal paste) Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300E (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001 430687-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 413682-001 Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.60-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.46-GHz processor 413896-001 413681-001 413680-001 7 T op co vers (include T ouchP ad) F or use with full-f eature d computer models with pointing stic k and finger pr int reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with T ouchP ad and finger pr int reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with T ouchP ad but without finger print reader F or use with def eatured computer models 413673-001 413674-001 413675-001 413672-001 Fingerprint reader board (not illustr ated; includes finger print reader board cable) 413695-001
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit 413704-001 8a 8b 8c 8d Includes: R TC batter y Microphone Memor y/Mini Card module cov er (includes 1 captive scre w) Hard drive co ver (includes 2 captiv e screws) Not illustrated: Computer f eet (6) PC Card slot space sav ers (2) 9 Modem module 399441-001 10 Mini Car d WW AN module 399440-001 11 Speaker 413697-001 12 USB/audio board (includes USB/audio board cab le) 413693-001 13 System boards F or use with full-f eature d computer models with Bluetooth and finger print reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with T ouchP ad F or use with full-f eature d computer models with finger print reader F or use with full-f eature d computer models with WW AN 416165-001 413669-001 413670-001 413671-001 F or use with def eatured computer models âGMâ F or use with def eatured computer models âGML â 413667-001 413668-001 14 Base enclosures F or use with full-f eatured computer models F or use with def eatured computer models 413689-001 413690-001
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â13 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categorized as most of the world 1 (MO W 1). 407575-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K o ng Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categorized as most of the world 2 (MO W 2). 407575-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland F rance Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â15 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categorized as the rest of the world RO W . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in J apan. 407575-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409280-004 Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â17 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the United States and Canada. 407254-001 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407254-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland F rance Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Ja pan. 407254-291
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â19 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 15 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the United States and Canada. 407253-001 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407253-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland F rance Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlan ds Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in J apan. 407253-291 16 Serial connector module (includes serial connector board cable) 413694-001 17 Memory modules PC2-5300 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â21 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 18 Optical drives (include bezel and optical driv e brac k et) 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive 413698-001 413699-001 413700-001 413702-001 413701-101 19 Batteries 6-cell, 4.8-Ah 6-cell, 4.0-Ah 372772-001 393652-001 20 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cable) 398393-001 21 Hard drives (include fr ame) 7200-r pm 60-GB 413854-001 5400-r pm 100-GB 80-GB 60-GB 40-GB 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 413850-001
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3. 3 Plas tic s Kit T able 3-2 Plastics Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit Includes: 413704-001 1 Memor y/Mini Card module co v er (includes 1 captiv e scre w) 2 Hard drive co v er (includes 2 captive scre ws) 3 R TC batter y 4 Computer f eet (6) 5 ExpressCard slot space sav er 6 PC Card slot space sa ver 7 Microphone
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 3 3.4 Ca bl e Kit Ta b l e 3 - 3 Cable Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Cable Kit Includes: 413703-001 1 T ouchP ad cab le 2 Modem cable 3 USB/audio board cable 4 Ser ial connector module cable 5 Bluetooth cable
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3.5 M a s s St ora g e De vi ce s
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 5 T able 3-4 Mass Storage De vices Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Har d drives (include frame) 7200-r pm, 60-GB 413854-001 5400-rpm, 100-GB 5400-r pm, 80-GB 5400-r pm, 60-GB 5400-r pm, 40-GB 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 413850-001 2 Optical drives (include bez el) 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive 413698-001 413699-001 413700-001 413702-001 413701-101
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 3.6 Miscell an eous (Not I llus trated) Ta b l e 3 - 5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information Description Spare P art Number 8-cell travel battery 367456-001 65-watt A C adapter 239704-001 External MultiBa y II 366143-001 External MultiBa y II power cable and stand 366144-001 HP Doc king Station 413267-001 HP Doc king Station 120 W A C adapter 391174-001 HP Doc king Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 380089-001 MultiBay 8X D VD-ROM Drive (f or use in Exter nal MultiBay II and HP Docking Station) 373314-001 MultiBay 24X D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive (f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II an d HP Doc king Station) 373315-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive (f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station) 375557-001 Nylon carrying case 325815-002
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 7 Po w e r c o r d s Fo r u s e i n : A ustralia 246959-011 Belgium, Europe, Finland, Germany , Greece, the Netherlands, Norwa y , P or tugal, Spain, and Sweden 246959-021 Brazil 246959-201 Canada, F rench Canada, La tin Amer ica, T aiwan, and the United States 246959-001 Denmark 246959-081 Hong K ong and the United Kingdom 246959-031 Israel 246959-BB1 Italy 246959-061 Japan 246959-291 K o rea 246959-AD1 Sweden 246959-A G1 Ta b l e 3 - 5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
3â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing screws; ref er to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â f or more inf orm ation on specifications and usage) 413705-001 â He x sock et HM5.0Ã9.0 screw loc k â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 shoulder screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 shoulder screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã7.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM1.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM1.5Ã3.5 screw â T orx8 T8M2.0Ã9.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.0Ã4.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.0Ã2.0 scre w Ta b l e 3 - 5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3 â2 9 3.7 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis tin g Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing Spare P art Number Description 239704-001 65-watt A C adapter 246959-001 P ower cord f or use in Canad a, F rench Canada, Latin America, T aiwan, and the United States 246959-011 P ower cord f or use in Austr alia 246959-021 P ower cord f or use in Be lgium, Europe, Finland, Ger many , Greece, the Netherlands, Norw a y , P or tugal, Spain, and Sweden 246959-031 P ower cord f or use in Hong K ong and the United Kingdom 246959-061 P ower cord f or use in Italy 246959-081 P ower cord f or use in Denmar k 246959-201 P ower cord f or use in Brazil 246959-291 P ower cord f or use in Japan 246959-AD1 P ower cord f or use in K orea 246959-A G1 P ower cord f or use in Sweden 246959-BB1 P ower cord f or use in Israel 325815-002 Nylon carr ying case 366143-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II 366144-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II po wer cab le and stand 367456-001 8-cell tra v el batter y 372772-001 6-cell, 4.8-Ah batter y 373314-001 MultiBa y 8X D VD-ROM Driv e (f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Docking Station)
3â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 373315-001 MultiBa y 24X D VD/CD-R W Co mbo Drive (f or use in External MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station) 375557-001 D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive (f or use in External MultiBay II and HP Doc king Station) 379799-001 Heat sink (i ncludes ther mal paste) 380089-001 HP Docking Statio n Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 391174-001 HP Docking Station 120 W A C adapter 393652-001 6-cell, 4.0-Ah batter y 398393-001 Bluetooth module (i ncludes Bluetooth module cable) 399440-001 Mini Card WW AN module 399441-001 Modem module 407254-001 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN Mi ni Card module f or use in the United States and Canada. Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â31 407254-002 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 407254-291 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN Mini Card module f or use in J apan. Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 407575-001 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mi ni Card module for use in the MO W 1 countries listed below . Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong P anama India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand P aragua y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 407575-002 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mi ni Card module for use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3 â3 3 407575-003 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below . China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407575-291 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN Mi ni Card module fo r use in Japan. 409280-004 802.11b/g GL WLAN Mini Ca rd module fo r use in the countr ies listed below . Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 413267-001 HP Docking Station 413667-001 System board f or use with def eatured computer models âGMâ 413668-001 System board or use with def eatured computer models âGML â 413669-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad 413670-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with finger print reader 413671-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with Mini Card WW AN module 413672-001 T op cov er for use with def eatured computer models (includes T ouchP ad) 413673-001 T op cov er for use with fu ll-f eatured computer models with pointing stick and fingerpr int reader (includes T ouchP ad) 413674-001 T op cov er for use with fu ll-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad and finger pr int reader (includes T ouchP ad) 413675-001 T op cov er for use with fu ll-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad but without finger print reader (includes T ouchP ad) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 413676-001 14.1-inch XGA, TFT displa y assembly f or use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 413677-001 15.0-inch XGA, TFT displa y assembly f or use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 413678-001 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT with Br ightVie w displa y assembly f or use with computer models witho ut WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 413679-001 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT displa y assemb ly f or use with computer models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 413680-001 Intel Celeron M 1.46-GHz processor (includes ther mal paste) 413681-001 Intel Celeron M 1.60-GHz processor (includes ther mal paste) 413682-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.66-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413683-001 Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413684-001 Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413685-001 Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413686-001 Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413687-001 Switch cov er for use wi th def eatured computer models (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 413688-001 Switch cov er for use with full-f eatured computer models (includes LED board and LED board cab le) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â35 413689-001 Base enclosure f or use wi th full-f eatured computer models 413690-001 Base enclosure f or use with def eatured computer models 413692-001 P ointing stick board (includes pointing stic k cab le) 413693-001 USB/audio board (includes USB/audio board cable) 413694-001 Serial connector modu le (includes ser ial connector board cable) 413695-001 Finger print reader board (includes finger print reader board cable) 413696-001 F an 413697-001 Speaker 413698-001 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 413699-001 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413700-001 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 413701-001 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 413702-001 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 413703-001 Cable Kit 413704-001 Plastics Kit 413706-001 Ther mal Grease Kit 413850-001 5400-r pm, 40-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413851-001 5400-r pm, 60-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413852-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413853-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB hard drive (includes frame) 413854-001 7200-r pm, 60-GB hard drive (includes frame) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 413896-001 Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz processor (includes ther mal paste) 414040-001 PC2-4200, 256-MB memor y module 414041-001 PC2-4200, 512-MB memor y module 414042-001 PC2-4200, 1024-MB memor y module 414044-001 PC2-5300, 256-MB memor y module 414045-001 PC2-5300, 512-MB memor y module 414046-001 PC2-5300, 10 24-MB memor y module 416038-001 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in the United States 416038-021 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Europe 416038-031 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in the United Kingdom 416038-041 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Ger many 416038-051 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in F rance 416038-061 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Italy 416038-071 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Spain 416038-081 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Denmar k 416038-091 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Norwa y Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 7 416038-111 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Switzerland 416038-121 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in F rench Canada 416038-131 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in P or tugal 416038-141 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in T ur ke y 416038-151 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Greece 416038-161 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Latin Amer ica 416038-171 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Saudi Arabia 416038-201 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Brazil 416038-211 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Hungar y 416038-221 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in the Czech Republic 416038-231 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Slov akia 416038-251 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Russia 416038-281 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Thailand 416038-291 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Japan Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 416038-A41 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Belgium 416038-AB1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in T aiwan 416038-AD1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in K orea 416038-BA1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Slovenia 416038-B71 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Sweden 416038-DD1 K eyboard f or use with comp uter models with pointing stic k and finger print reader in Israel 416039-001 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in the United States 416039-021 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Europe 416039-031 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in the United Kingdom 416039-041 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Ger many 416039-051 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in F rance 416039-061 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Italy 416039-071 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Spain 416039-081 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Denmar k Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 9 416039-091 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Norwa y 416039-111 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Switzerland 416039-121 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in F rench Canada 416039-131 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in P or tugal 416039-141 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in T ur ke y 416039-151 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Greece 416039-161 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Latin Amer ica 416039-171 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Saudi Arabia 416039-201 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Brazil 416039-211 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Hungar y 416039-221 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in the Czech Republic 416039-231 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Slov akia 416039-251 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Russia 416039-281 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Thailand Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Catalog 416039-291 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Japan 416039-A41 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Belgium 416039-AB1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in T aiwan 416039-AD1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in K orea 416039-BA1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Slovenia 416039-B71 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Sweden 416039-DD1 K eyboard f or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader in Israel 416165-001 System board f or use with full-f eatured computer models with Bluetooth and finger print reader 430687-001 Intel Core Duo T2300E (1.67-GHz) proc essor (includes ther mal paste) 430966-001 15.0-inch XGA, TFT displa y assembly f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wi reless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 430967-001 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT displa y assemb ly f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â1 4 Remo v al an d Repl a cement Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdri ver â Phillips P0 scre wdri v er â T orx8 scre wdriv er â 5.0-mm socket for system board scre wlocks â Flat-bladed scre wdri v er
4â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) away from the work area to pre v ent damage. Pl a s t i c Pa r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. Ca bl es and C onnec tors à CA UTION: When se rvi c ing the compute r , be sur e that cables ar e placed in their pr oper locations dur ing the r e as sembl y pr oces s. Impr oper cable placement can damage the compu ter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remo ved or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v enti ng Da mage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able driv es are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o pre vent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able driv e, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and be sure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, be sure that you are dischar ged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a v oid touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surf aces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri v es from any height onto an y surf ace. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri ve, or a diskette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.4 Pr e v entin g Elec trosta tic D ama ge Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vice parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice e xposed to electrostatic discharge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectanc y .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â5 4.5 P ac k a gin g and T ranspor tin g Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o a void hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro ved containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti v e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free w orkstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.6 W orkstation Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with appro v ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve field service tools, such as cutters, scre wdri vers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn off po wer and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment. 4.7 Groundin g E quip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap.
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â7 â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be ef fectiv e, the conducti ve strips must be w orn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti ve foam â Conducti ve tabletop w orkstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or box es â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials
4â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies T a ble 4-1 sho ws ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le ve ls generated by dif ferent activities. T a ble 4-2 lists the shielding protection pro vided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V oltage Le vels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubb le pac k from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Pr otection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â1 5 Remo v al an d Repl a cement Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo v al and replacement procedures. There are as many as 58 scre ws and screw locks, in 11 dif ferent sizes, that must be remov ed, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w and scre w lock size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix A, âScre w Listing, â for detailed information on scre w and scre w lock sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 Seri al Number Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 5 .2 Disassem bl y Seque nce Chart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Chart Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer f or Disassemb ly Batter y 0 5.4 Hard Driv e 2 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 1 loosened to remov e the hard drive 4 to remov e the hard dr iv e frame 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Bluetooth Module 0 5.7 External Memor y Module 1 loosened to remove the memor y/Mini Card module cov er 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module 2 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in the computer by the go v ernmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you replace the de vice and then receive a w arning message, remo v e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care through the Help and Suppor t Center . 5.9 Optical Driv e 1 to remov e the optical dr ive 2 to remov e the optical dr ive brac k et
5â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.10 Key b o a r d 2 5.11 Fa n 2 loosened 5.12 Heat Sink 4 loosened 5.13 Processor 1 loosened 5.14 RTC B a t t e r y 0 5.15 Internal Memor y Module 0 5.16 Mini Card WW AN Module 2 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you install a de vice and then receive a w arning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.17 Switch Co v er 2 5.18 Displa y Assembly 6 5.19 To p C o v e r 15 5.20 Speak er 1 5.21 Microphone 0 5.22 Modem Module 2 5.23 USB/A udio Board 1 5.24 System Board 1 screw 4 screw loc ks 5.25 Serial Connector Module 2 screw loc ks Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 .3 Preparing t h e Com pu ter f or Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remo v al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord.
5â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the battery b y follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. b . Slide the battery release latch on the right 1 and then the battery release latch on the left 2 to release the battery . c. Slide the battery 3 straight back and remov e it. R emo v ing the Battery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery . Battery Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation 6-cell, 4.8-Ah 6-cell, 4.0-Ah 372772-001 393652-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â7 5 .4 H ard Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. 3. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve co v er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the hard dri v e cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the hard dri ve cov er . â The hard dri ve co v er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. Har d Drive Spare P art Number Information 7200-r pm, 60-GB 413854-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB 5400-r pm, 80-GB 5400-r pm, 60-GB 5400-r pm, 40-GB 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 413850-001
5â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es R emo v ing the Har d Dr i ve C o v er
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â9 6. Loosen the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded hard dri v e retention scre w 1 . 7. Grasp the mylar tab 2 on the hard dri v e and slide the hard dri v e to the right 3 to disconnect it from the system board. 8. Remov e the hard dri ve 4 from the hard dri ve bay . R emo v ing the Har d Dr i ve
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 9. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 hard dri v e frame scre ws 1 from each side of the hard dri v e. 10. Lift the frame 2 straight up to remov e if from the hard dri ve. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i ve F rame Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â11 5. 5 C o m p u t e r Fe e t The computer feet are adhesi v e-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. R eplac ing the Com puter F eet
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .6 Bluetoot h Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ). 3. Slide the Bluetooth module 1 out of the clip in the hard dri v e compartment. 4. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable 2 from the module. R emo v ing the Bluet ooth Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Bluetooth module. Bluetooth Module Spare P art Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Bluetooth cable) 398393-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â13 5 .7 External Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory/Mini Card module cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the rear edge of the cov er 2 up and swing it to ward you. 5. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver . â The memory/Mini Card module cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. R emo v ing the Memory/Mini Car d Module Co v er
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â15 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 7. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 8. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with notches 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .8 M ini C ard WLAN Modul e Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P art Number Information 802.11a/b/g Intel Mini Card WLAN module f or use in the MO W 1 countries listed below: 407575-001 Antigua & Barbuda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K o ng Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand P aragua y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407575-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finand Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Phillippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â17 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g Intel WLAN module f or use in Japan. 407575-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409280-004 Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emir ates Ukraine 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f o r use in the United States and Canada. 407254-001 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN modul e f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407254-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finand Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Phillippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan. 407254-291 Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P art Number Information (Continued)
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ). 3. Position the computer with the front to ward you. 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the United States and Canada. 404253-001 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN modu le f or use in the MO W 2 countries listed below . 407253-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finand Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Phillippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan. 407253-291 Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P art Number Information (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â19 4. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WLAN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main antenna cables 1 from the module. 5. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WLAN module to the computer . 6. Remov e the Mini Card WLAN module 3 b y pulling the module from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card WLAN modules are designed with notches 4 to pre v ent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d WLAN Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WLAN module.
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .9 O ptical Driv e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ). 3. Position the computer with the right side to ward you. Optical Drive Spare P art Number Information 24X Max CD-R OM drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 413698-001 413699-001 413700-001 413702-001 413701-101
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â21 4. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.0Ã9.0 screw 1 that secures the optical dri ve to the computer . 5. Insert a flat-bladed dri v er into the slot 2 on the bottom of the computer and push the tab . 6. Remov e the optical dri ve 3 from the computer . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 7. If it is necessary to replace the optical dri ve brack et, remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the bracket to the optical dri v e. 8. Remov e the optical dri ve bracket 2 . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install an optical dri ve.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 3 5. 1 0 K e y b o a r d Ke yboar d Spare P ar t Number Information F or use with computer models with pointing stick and fingerpr int reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416038-A41 416038-201 416038-221 416038-081 416038-021 416038-051 416038-121 416038-041 416038-151 416038-211 416038-DD1 416038-BB1 416038-061 416038-291 416038-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416038-161 416038-091 416038-131 416038-251 416038-171 416038-231 416038-BA1 416038-071 416038-B71 416038-111 416038-AB1 416038-281 416038-141 416038-031 416038-001 P ointing stick boar d (not illustrated, includes pointing stic k cable) 413692-001
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ). Ke yboards (Continued) F or use with computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416039-A41 416039-201 416039-221 416039-081 416039-021 416039-051 416039-121 416039-041 416039-151 416039-211 416039-DD1 416039-BB1 416039-061 416039-291 416039-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416039-161 416039-091 416039-131 416039-251 416039-171 416039-231 416039-BA1 416039-071 416039-B71 416039-111 416039-AB1 416039-281 416039-141 416039-031 416039-001 Ke yboar d Spare P ar t Number Information (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 5 3. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.0Ã9.0 scre ws that secure the ke yboard to the computer . R emo v ing the K ey boar d Scr ew s
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Open the computer as far as possible. 6. Slide the 4 ke yboard retaining latches to ward you. R eleasing the K ey board L atc hes
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 7 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard up and swing it to ward you until it rests on the palm rest. R eleasing the K ey board
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the ke yboard cable is attached and disconnect the ke yboard cable 2 . â Step 9 applies only to computer models with a pointing stick. 9. Release the ZIF connector 3 to which the pointing stick cable is attached and disconnect the pointing stick cable 4 . Disconnec ting the K e y boar d and P ointing S ti ck C able s 10. Remov e the ke yboard. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â2 9 5. 1 1 F a n 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. 4. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã7.0 scre ws 2 that secure the fan to the computer . 5. Remov e the fan 3 . R emo v ing the F an Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan. F an Spare P art Number Information F an 379799-001
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 2 Hea t Sink 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the fan ( Section 5.11 ). Heat Sink Spare P art Number Information Heat sink (includes ther mal paste) 379799-001 Ther mal Grease Kit (not illustrated) 413706-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â31 4. Loosen the four Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 shoulder scre ws 1 that secure the heat sink to the computer . 5. Lift the right side of the heat sink 2 to disengage it from the processor . 6. Slide the heat sink 3 to the right to remov e it. â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink from side to side to detach the heat sink from the processor . R emo v ing the Heat Sink
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the heat sink 1 and processor 2 each time the heat sink is remov ed. Thermal paste is included with all heat sink and processor spare part kits. Th erm a l P as te Lo c a ti on s Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â3 3 5. 1 3 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the fan ( Section 5.11 ). 4. Remov e the heat sink ( Section 5.12 ). Pr ocessor Spare P art Number Information Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300E (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001 430687-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 413682-001 Intel Celeron M 1.73-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.60-GHz processor Intel Celeron M 1.46-GHz processor 413896-001 413681-001 413680-001
5â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri v er to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-half turn counterclockwise until you hear a click. 6. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remov e it. â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle icon 4 embossed on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocesso r Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â35 5. 1 4 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Disconnect the R TC battery cable 1 from the system board. 4. Remov e the R TC battery 2 from the clip in the top cov er . R emo v ing the R T C Bat tery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery .
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 5 Inter n al Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation 1024 MB 512 MB 336579-001 336578-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 7 3. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 4. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle . 5. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with notches 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 6 Mini C ard WW AN Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Mini Car d WW AN Module Spare P art Number Information Mini Card WW AN module 399440-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 9 3. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WW AN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main antenna cables 1 from the module. 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WW AN module to the computer . 5. Remov e the Mini Card WW AN module 3 by pulling the module from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card WW AN modules are designed with notches 4 to pre v ent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d WW AN Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WW AN module.
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 7 Sw i t c h C ove r â Both switch cov er spare part kits include an LED board and LED board cable. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. Switch Co ver Spare P ar t Number Information F or use with full-f eatured computer models F or use with def eatured computer models 413688-001 413687-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â41 4. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.0Ã2.0 scre ws that secure the switch cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ve r Sc r e w s
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. T urn the computer display-side up with front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Disconnect the LED board cable 1 from the system board. 8. Insert a flat-bladed scre wdri v er into the four notches 2 on the front edge of the switch cov er 3 and lift up until the co ver disengages from the computer . 9. Remov e the switch co ver . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ve r Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â43 5 . 1 8 Displa y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory compartment co ver ( Section 5.7 ) and disconnect the wireless antenna cables from the Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ). 3. Remov e the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 4. Remov e the switch co ver ( Section 5.17 ) Displa y Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information Displa y assemb lies f or use with computer models with WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 430967-001 430966-001 Displa y assemb lies f or use with comp uter models without WW AN (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and c ab les) 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT , with BrightView 15.0-inch XGA, TFT 14.1-inch XGA, TFT 413679-001 413678-001 413677-001 413676-001
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the system board. 6. Remov e the WLAN antenna cables 2 from the routing channels 3 in the base enclosure. Disconnec ting the Displa y and W ir eles s Ca bles
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â4 5 7. Swing the display assembly into a partially closed position. 8. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. Ã CA UTION: Support the display a ssembl y w hen r emo v ing the fo llo w ing sc r e ws . Failur e to support the display as sembl y can r esult in damage to the displa y asse mbly and other com puter components . 9. Remov e the six T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 screws 1 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 10. Lift the display assembly 2 straight up and remov e it. R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the display assembly
5â4 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 9 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. T op Co ver Spare Part Number Information F or use with full-f eatured comput er models with pointing stic k and finger print reader 413673-001 F or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad and finger print reader 413674-001 F or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad but without finger print reader 413675-001 F or use with def eatured computer models 413672-001 Finger print reader board (not il lustrated; includes finger print reader board cable) 413695-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 7 3. Remov e the thirteen T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 screws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er S cr ew s, P ar t 1
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er S cr ew s, P ar t 2
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 9 6. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 R TC battery cable 2 T ouchPad cable 3 Fingerprint reader board cable 7. Remov e the microphone 4 from the hole in the top co ver . Disconnec ting the R T C Battery , T ouchP ad , and F ingerpr int R eader Boar d Ca bles
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Lift up the rear edge of the top cov er 1 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 9. Swing the top cov er 2 to ward you until the left and right sides of the top cov er disengage from the base enclosure. 10. Lift up on the left 3 and right sides 4 of the top cov er until the top cov er disengages from the base enclosure. R eleasing the T op Co ver 11. Lift the top cov er straight up until the front edge of the top cov er disengages from the base enclosure and remo v e the top cove r . Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â51 5. 2 0 S p e a ke r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) Speaker Spare P art Number Information Speak er 413697-001
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Disconnect the speaker cable from the system board. Disconnec ting the Speak er Cable
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 3 3. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.0Ã4.0 screw 1 that secures the speaker to the computer . 4. Remov e the speaker 2 from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the S peak er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the speaker .
5â5 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 2 1 M i c r o p h o n e â The microphone is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 413704-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 )
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 2. Disconnect the microphone cable 1 from the system board and remov e the microphone 2 . R emo v ing the Mi c r ophone Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the microphone.
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .2 2 Modem Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) Modem Module Spare P art Number Information Modem module 399441-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 7 2. Remov e the modem connector 1 from the clip in the base enclosure. 3. Disconnect the modem cable 2 from the system board. R emo v ing the Modem Module C able
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 scre ws 1 that secure the modem module to the system board. 5. Lift the front edge of the modem module 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 6. Disconnect the modem cable 3 from the modem module. R emo v ing the Modem Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 9 5 .23 USB/Au dio Board 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory/Mini Card module co ver ( Section 5.7 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) USB/A udio Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information USB/audio board (includes au dio board cable and USB board cable) 413693-001
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. 3. Release the ZIF connector to which the USB/audio board cable is connected and disconnect the USB/audio board cable 1 . 4. Remov e the Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre w 2 that secures the USB/audio board to the base enclosure. 5. Remov e the cable from the clips in the base enclosure. 6. Remov e the USB/audio board 3 . R emo v ing the U SB/Audi o Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the USB/audio board.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â61 5. 24 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, be sure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defecti ve system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.7 and Section 5.15 ) â Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ) â Processor ( Section 5.13 ) â Mini Card WW AN module ( Section 5.16 ) â Modem module and cable ( Section 5.22 ) 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth module ( Section 5.6 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Fan ( Section 5.11 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.12 ) System Boar d Spare P art Number Information F or use with full-f eatured computer models with Bluetooth and finger print reader F or use with full-f eatured computer models with T ouchP ad F or use with full-f eatured computer models with finger print reader F or use with full-f eatured computer models with Mini Card WW AN module 416165-001 413669-001 413670-001 413671-001 F or use with def eatured computer models âGMâ F or use with def eatured computer models âGML â 413667-001 413668-001
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es g. R TC battery ( Section 5.14 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.20 ) l. Microphone ( Section 5.21 ) m. USB/audio board ( Section 5.23 ) 2. Disconnect the serial connector cable 1 and the Bluetooth cable 2 from the system board. 3. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 screw 3 that secures the system board to the base enclosure next to the RJ-11 connector . 4. Remov e the two HM5.0Ã9.0 scre w locks 4 on each side of the parallel connector . 5. Remov e the two HM5.0Ã9.0 scre w locks 5 on each side of the external monitor connectors. R emo v ing the S ys tem Boar d Scr ew s and Scr ew L ocks
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â63 6. Use the optical dri ve connector to lift the system board 1 until the po wer connector 2 is clear of the base enclosure. 7. Slide the system board 3 to the left at an angle and remov e it. R emo v ing the S ys tem Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the system board.
5â64 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .25 Serial C onnec tor Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth module ( Section 5.6 ) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. Fan ( Section 5.11 ) g. Heat sink ( Section 5.12 ) h. R TC battery ( Section 5.14 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.20 ) l. USB/audio board ( Section 5.23 ) Serial Connector Module Spare P art Number Information Serial connector module (i ncludes ser ial connector module cable) 413694-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â6 5 2. Remov e the two HM5.0Ã9.0 scre w locks 1 on each side of the serial connector . 3. Lift the serial connector module and cable 2 out of the base enclosure. 4. Disconnect the serial connector module cable 3 from the system board. R emo v ing the Se r ial C onnect or Module Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the serial connector module.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â1 6 Spec ific ations This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height Width Depth 32.8 cm 26.7 cm 3.1 cm 12.91 10.51 1.22 W eight With 15.0-inch displa y , optical drive , and 6-cell batter y pack 2.86 kg 6.31 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A T emperature Operating (not writing to optical disc) Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep r ate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep r ate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 15.0-inch, SXGA WV A, TFT Display Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 30.0 cm 22.9 cm 38.1 cm 11.8 in 9.0 in 15.0 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 150 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.264 à 0.264 mm 1400 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 5.5 W Viewing angle /-35° horizontal, 15/-35° v er tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 15.0-inch, XGA, TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 30.0 cm 22.9 cm 38.1 cm 11.8 in 9.0 in 15.0 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 150 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.264 à 0.264 mm 1024 à 768 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 5.5 W Viewing angle /-35° horizontal, 15/-35° v er tical typical
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 14.1-inch, XGA, TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 28.5 cm 21.3 cm 35.8 cm 11.2 in 8.4 in 14.1 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.279 à 0.279 mm 1024 à 768 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4.0 W Viewing angle /-40° horizontal, 120/-40° v er tical typical
6â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 5 Har d Drives 100-GB* 80-GB* 60-GB* 40-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g Interface type SA T A SA T A SA T A SA T A T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 195,363,650 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 5400 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusi ons apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly .
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 6 Primary 6-cell, Li-Ion Batter y P ack Dimensions Height Width Depth We i g h t 2.00 cm 9.40 cm 13.40 cm 0.34 kg 0.79 in 3.70 in 5.28 in 0.75 lb Energ y V oltage Amp-hour capacity W att-hour capacity 11.1 V 4.4 Ah 48 Wh T emperature Operating Nonoperating 5°C to 45°C 0°C to 60°C 41°F to 113°F 32°F to 140°F
6â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 7 DV D - R O M D r i v e Applicable disc DV D - R O M ( DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 100 ms < 175 ms < 125 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 512 KB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 10 seconds Stop time < 3 seconds
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 8 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-RW , D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and mult ise ssi on) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD media D VD media Random Full strok e < 110 ms < 210 ms < 130 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 V r ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 8 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â11 Ta b l e 6 - 9 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 9 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â13 T able 6-10 CD-R OM Drive Applicable disc CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-RCD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-11 System DMA Hard ware DMA S ystem Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A vailab le f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â15 T ab le 6-12 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K e y or Microsoft Natural K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant ACâLink A udio Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controllerâ24C3 Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Disk ette dr ive IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time cloc k IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C2 Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI f ast Ether net Controller
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 Intel USB EHCI controllerâ24CD Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C4 Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C7 Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T ouchP ad IRQ13 Numer ic data processor IRQ14 Pri mar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. T ab le 6-12 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â17 T able 6-13 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x ) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Un used 020 - 021 I nterrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configur ation registers 025 - 03F Un used 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Un used 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 U nused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Un used 070 - 071 N MI enable/R TC 072 - 07F Un used 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 U nused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Un used 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x ) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Un used 170 - 177 S econdar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Primar y fixed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Un used 201 Joystic k (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Un used 220 - 22F Entertainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Un used 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t T able 6-13 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â19 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Un used 320 - 36F Un used 370 - 377 S econdar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 U nused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Serial por t (COM1/def ault) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-13 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-14 System Memory Map Size Memory Address System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memory 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super ex tended memor y 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Unused 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ1 A Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws and scre w locks used in the computer . All scre ws and scre w locks listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Scre w Kit, spare part number 378235-001.
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the hard driv e cov er to the computer (scre ws are captured on the cov er by C-clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 One scre w that secures the memor y/Min i Card module cov er to the computer (screw is captured on the co v e r b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.7 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ3 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WL AN to the computer (documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 scre ws that secure the optical drive brac k et to the optical drive (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ5 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WW AN to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Scr ew L ocation Ta b l e A - 2 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Spring-loaded Har d Drive Retention Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the hard driv e to the computer (screw is captured on the hard drive frame b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ7 Phillips P M3 . 0Ã4.0 Sc re w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 3 Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 4.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure the hard drive frame to the hard driv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Aâ8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocation Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the optical dr iv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ9 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the k eyboard to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ; left screw also secures optical driv e) mm
Aâ10 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ11 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Aâ12 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 13 screws that secure the top co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ13 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 24 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Aâ14 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã2 . 0 Sc re w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 5 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã2.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 2.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ15 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the f an to the co mputer (screws are captured on the f an assembly b y an O-clip; documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
Aâ16 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M2 .5Ã8. 0 Shoulder Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 Phillips PM2.5Ã8.0 Shoulder Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 8.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hea t sink to the computer ( scre ws are captured on the heat sink by C-clips; documented in Section 5.12 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ17 Phill ips P M2 .5Ã3. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 3.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the modem modu le to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
Aâ18 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati on Ta b l e A - 9 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the speak er to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ19 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati on Ta b l e A - 9 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the system bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) mm
Aâ20 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g Phillips P M1. 5Ã3 . 0 Scr ew L ocati on T ab le A-10 Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 3.0 mm 1.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the USB/audio board the computer (documented in Section 5.23 ) mm
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ21 He x Soc k et HM5 . 0Ã9 . 0 Sc r ew L oc k Locati ons T ab le A-11 Hex Soc ket HM5.0Ã9.0 Screw Lock Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 6 9.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) 2 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) mm
Aâ2 2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listin g He x Soc k et HM5 . 0Ã9 . 0 Sc r ew L oc k Locati ons T ab le A-11 Hex Soc ket HM5.0Ã9.0 Screw Loc k (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 6 9.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screw loc ks that secure the ser ial connector board to the system board (documented in Section 5.25 ) mm
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ1 B Soft w ar e B ac k up an d Rec o v er y Back up HP Backup and Recov ery Manager pro vides se veral w ays to back up the system and to recov er optimal system functionality . â HP installed dri v ers, utilities, a nd applications can be copied to a CD or to a D VD using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â The computer must be connected to external po wer before you perform backup and recov ery procedures. Safeguarding Y our Da ta T o safeguard your documents, store personal f iles in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder .
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery B ac kin g Up t h e S y stem Using HP Backup and Restore Manager , you can â Back up specif ic files and folders. â Back up the entire system. â Back up modif ications since your last backup, using HP system restore points. â Schedule backups. Ba c king Up S pec ific Files or F old ers Y ou can back up specif ic files or folders to the hard dri ve, to an optional external hard dri ve, or to discs. â This process will take se veral minutes, depending on the f ile size and the speed of the computer . T o back up specific f iles or folders: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up individual f iles and folders , and then click Next . The Backup W izard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Backup selected f iles fr om most common locations (Recommended) . â or â Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access adv anced f iltering techniques. 7. Click Next. 8. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Bac k up and R eco ve ry Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ3 B ac kin g Up t h e Entire Hard Driv e When you perform a complete backup of the hard dri v e, you are sa ving the full factory image, including the W indo ws operating system, software applications, and all personal f iles and folders. â A copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve, on a netw ork dri v e, or on recov ery discs that you create. â This process may take o v er an hour , depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. T o back up your entire hard driv e: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up entire hard dri ve , and then click Next . The âBack up entire hard diskâ page opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select the location for the backup f iles, and then click Next . 7. Select the Protect data access with passw ord check box, and type your password in the Passw ord and Conf irm boxes. â This step is optional. If you do not want to password-protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with passw ord check box. 8. Click Next. 9. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery Ba c king U p Modifications M ad e to the S y ste m When you back up modif ications since your last backup, you are creating system recov ery points. This allo ws you to sav e a snapshot of your hard dri v e at a specific point in time. Y ou can then recov er back to that point if you w ant to re verse subsequent changes made to your system. â The f irst system recov ery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the f irst time you perform a backup. Subsequent recov ery points mak e a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recov ery points â Before you add or extensi vely modify software or hardw are. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . â Recov ering to an earlier reco very point does not af fect data f iles or e-mails created since that recov ery point. After you create a recov ery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recov ery points. Y ou can schedule recovery points for a specif ic time or e vent in your system. T o create and schedule a system recovery point: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Create or manage Reco very P oints , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Point Managerâ page opens. 5. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Bac k up and R eco ve ry Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ5 Sc heduling Ba c k ups T o schedule backups: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler . The âBackup Schedulerâ page opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Schedule system recov ery points at specif ic interv als (no w , daily , weekly , or monthly) or at specific e vents, such as at system start or when you dock to an optional docking station (select computer models only), by clicking one of the a v ailable options. Click Next to further def ine the settings. A summary of your system recov ery point settings is displayed. 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Rec o v e r y HP Backup and Recov ery Manager analyzes the hard dri ve and creates a dedicated hard dri v e rec ov ery partition on the hard dri v e large enough to store a cop y of the full factory image. Y ou can choose whether you want to store that cop y on the recov ery partition, on another dri v e, or on external reco v ery discs. â Before using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager , try repairing the system by running Microsoft W indows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support , and then search for âSystem Restore. â
Bâ6 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery HP Backup and Recov ery Manager allo ws you to â Cr eate reco very discs (highly r ecommended). The recov ery discs are used to start up your computer and to recov er the full f actory image (operating system and software) in case of system f ailure or instability . â If you do not ha ve a CD or D VD burner , a copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve or on a network dri ve. â P erf orm a r ecov ery . Y ou can perform a full system recovery or recov er important f iles from the recovery partition on the hard dri ve, from another dri ve, or from reco very discs that you create. Creating Reco v er y Disc s (Hi ghly Recommended) After setting up the computer for the f irst time, you can create a set of recov ery discs of the full factory image, using Reco very Media Creator in the HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . The recov ery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recov er the operating system and softwa re to factory settings in case of system failure or instability . Ã CA UTION: After y ou cr eate the r eco v ery discs, y ou can incr ease the amount of a v ailable space on the har d dri v e b y deleting the r e co v ery partition . Ho w e v er , doing this is n o t r ecommended . If y ou delete this partition , y ou w ill los e an y inf ormati on that is on the partition . â Only one set of recov ery discs can be created for this computer .
So ft w ar e Bac k up and R eco ve ry Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ7 Before creating recov ery discs: â Obtain high-quality CD-R, D VD-R, or D VD R media, purchased separately . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Number each disc before inserti ng it into the optical dri v e of the computer . â If necessary , you can cancel Recov ery Media Creator before you ha ve f inished creating the recov ery discs. The next time you open Recov ery Media Creator , you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left of f. T o create a set of recovery discs: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory softwar e recov ery CDs or D VDs to r ecover the system (Highly r ecommended) , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Media Creatorâ page opens. 4. Click Next. 5. Click Write to CD/D VD , and then click Next . 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Pe r f o r m i n g a R e c o v e r y P erforming a Reco very from t he Reco v er y Disc s T o perform a recovery from the reco very discs: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Insert the f irst recov ery disc into the optical dri v e and restart the computer . 3. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ8 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery P erforming a Reco v er y from t he H ard Driv e There are 2 ways to initiate a reco v ery from the hard dri ve: â From within W indows. â From the recov ery partition. Initia ting a Reco v er y in Win do ws T o initiate a recovery in W indows: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recov er important f iles or the entir e system , and then click Next . 5. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . â If you choose to recov er the system, the computer restarts and recov ery be gins. 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Initia ting a Reco v er y from th e Hard Driv e Reco v er y P artition T o initiate a recovery from the hard dri ve reco very partition: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Restart the computer , and then press f11 before the W indows operating system loads. 3. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ1 C Dis pl a y C ompon ent Recy c lin g à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . à CA UTION: The pr ocedure s in this appendi x can r esult in damage to displa y components . T he only compo nents intended f or r ecy c ling purpo ses ar e the liquid c rys tal displa y (L CD) panel and the backlight . Car eful handling should be e x er c ised w hen r emo v ing these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the backlight in the display assembly that might require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Câ2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the liquid crystal display (LCD) panel 2. â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another .
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all scre w covers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Sc re w Co v er s and Sc r e w s
Câ4 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Dis play Bez el
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ5 4. Disconnect all display panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remo ve the in verter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv erter
Câ6 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 5. Remov e all scre ws 1 that secure the display panel assembly to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the display panel assembly 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the Dis play P anel As sembl y
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ7 7. T urn the display panel assembly upside do wn. 8. Remov e all scre ws that secure the display panel frame to the display panel. R emo v ing the Dis play P anel F r ame Sc r ew s
Câ8 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the sides of the display panel to the display panel frame. 10. Remov e the display panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v ing the Dis play F rame
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ9 11. Remov e the scre ws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the display panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight co ver . R emo v ing the Bac klight C o v er
Câ10 Main tenance and Se rvi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 14. T urn the display panel right-side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the display panel. R eleasing the Bac klight C able s
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ11 16. T urn the display panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the display panel. R emo v ing the Bac klight F r ame
Câ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v ing the Bac klight
Displa y Com ponent R ecy cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the scre ws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the display rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the display rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the display rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P a nel
Câ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P a nel 24. Recycle the LCD panel and backlight.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ1 D Co nnec tor P in As sig nmen ts Ta b l e D - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, r ight channel
Dâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 2 A udio-In (Micr ophone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e D - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ3 Ta b l e D - 4 Serial Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Carrier detect 6 Data set ready 2 Receiv e data 7 Ready to send 3 T r ansmit data 8 Clear to send 4 Data terminal ready 9 Ring indicator 5G r o u n d
Dâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 5 P arallel P or t Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Strobe 14 A uto linef e ed 2 Data bit 0 15 Error 3 Data bit 1 16 Initializ e printer 4 Data bit 2 17 Select in 5 Data bit 3 18 Ground 6 Data bit 4 19 Ground 7 Data bit 5 20 Ground 8 Data bit 6 21 Ground 9 Data bit 7 22 Ground 10 Ackno wledge 23 Ground 11 Busy 24 Ground 12 P aper end 25 Ground 13 Select
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ5 Ta b l e D - 6 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color g round
Dâ6 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 7 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Hor izontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B clock 8 Ground analog
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ7 Ta b l e D - 8 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Un used 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Dâ8 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 9 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T r ansmit 5 Unused 2 T r ansmit â 6 Receive â 3 Receiv e 7 Unused 4 Un used 8 Unused
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ1 E P o w er C ord Set Requirem ents 3-Con duc tor P o w er Cord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Eâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Co rd Set R equirements Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OVE 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance U TE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J a panese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Eâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Republic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J a panese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance co upler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â9 A AC adapter, spare part number 3â26 , 3â29 arrow keys 1â15 audio troubleshooting 2â21 audio-in jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 audio-out jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 B base enclosure, spare part numbers 3â11 , 3â35 battery removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â29 , 3â30 , 5â6 battery bay 1â13, 1â20 battery light 1â7 battery pack specifications 6â7 battery release latch 1â20 Bluetooth cable, illustrated 3â23 Bluetooth module removal 5â12 spare part number 3â21, 3â30 , 5â12 bottom components 1â20 C Cable Kit contents 3â23 spare part number 3â23, 3â35 cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â15 caps lock light 1â19 carrying case, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 CD-ROM drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â13 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â20 front 1â6 keyboard 1â12, 1â14
Inde xâ2 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x left-side 1â10 rear 1â10 right-side 1â8 top 1â16, 1â18 computer feet illustrated 3â22 locations 5â11 Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â5 Diagnostics Menu 2â4 File Menu 2â2 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â3 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Dâ2 audio-out Dâ1 external monitor Dâ6 headphone Dâ1 microphone Dâ2 modem Dâ7 monitor Dâ6 network Dâ8 parallel Dâ4 RJ-11 Dâ7 RJ-45 Dâ8 serial Dâ3 S-Video-out Dâ5 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Dâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â22 Digital Media Slot 1â7 Digital Media Slot light 1â7 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â19 precautions 4â3 display assembly removal 5â43 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â34 , 3â40 , 5â43 specifications 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 display component recycling Câ1 display lid switch 1â17 display release button 1â7 docking connector 1â20 docking station AC adapter spare part number 3â26, 3â30 Docking Station, HP spare part number 3â26, 3â33 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â30 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â9
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ3 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â11 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive, spare part number 3â26, 3â30 DVD-ROM drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part number 3â21, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â29 , 3â35 , 5â20 specifications 6â8 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 exhaust vents 1â11 expansion product troubleshooting 2â14 ExpressCard slot 1â11 ExpressCard slot space saver, illustrated 3â22 external monitor port location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ6 External MultiBay II power cable and stand, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 External MultiBay II, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 F f1 to f12 keys 1â15 fan removal 5â29 spare part number 3â7 , 3â35 , 5â29 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â22 locations 5â11 fingerprint reader board cable, disconnection 5â49 fingerprint reader board, spare part number 3â9, 3â35 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â21, 2â22 no network/modem connection 2â26 no OS loading 2â15 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â19 no OS loading from hard drive 2â16, 2â17, 2â18 no OS loading from optical drive 2â20 no power 2â8, 2â10, 2â11 no video 2â12, 2â13 nonfunctioning device 2â23 nonfunctioning docking device 2â14 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â24 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â25
Inde xâ4 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x fn key 1â15 front components 1â6 G grounding equipment and methods 4â6 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â16 precautions 4â3 removal 5â7 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â25 , 3â35 , 5â7 specifications 6â6 hard drive bay 1â21 hard drive cover illustrated 3â22 removal 5â7 hard drive frame, removal 5â10 headphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 heat sink removal 5â30 spare part number 3â7, 3â30 , 5â30 HP Docking Station AC adapter, spare part number 3â26 , 3â30 HP Docking Station, spare part number 3â26, 3â33 I I/O address specifications 6â17 interrupt specifications 6â15 K keyboard removal 5â23, 5â24 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â7 , 3â36 , 3â37 , 3â38 , 3â39 , 3â40 , 5â23 , 5â24 troubleshooting 2â24 keyboard components 1â12, 1â14 keypad keys 1â15 L left-side components 1â10 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â24 memory map specifications 6â20 memory module removal 5â13, 5â36 spare part numbers 3â19, 3â36 , 5â13 , 5â36 memory/Mini Card module compartment 1â21 memory/Mini Card module cover illustrated 3â22 removal 5â14 microphone illustrated 3â22 release 5â49 microphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ5 Mini Card compartment 1â21 Mini Card WLAN module removal 5â16 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â15 , 3â17 , 3â19 , 5â16 Mini Card WWAN module removal 5â38 spare part number 3â11, 3â30 , 5â38 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit (for use with docking device), spare part number 3â26, 3â30 modem cable illustrated 3â23 removal 5â57 modem jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ7 modem module removal 5â56 spare part number 3â11, 3â30 , 5â56 troubleshooting 2â26 monitor port location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ6 N network jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ8 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â14, 2â23 num lock key 1â15 num lock light 1â19 O optical drive location 1â9 OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â20 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â29 , 3â30 , 5â20 specifications 6â8, 6â9, 6â11 , 6â13 optical drive bracket, removal 5â22 P packing precautions 4â5 parallel port location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ4 password clearing 1â4 PC Card slot 1â11 PC Card slot space saver 3â22 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit contents 3â22 spare part number 3â11, 3â22 , 3â35 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 pointing stick 1â19 pointing stick board, spare part number 3â7, 3â35 , 5â23 pointing stick buttons 1â19 power button 1â16
Inde xâ6 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x power connector 1â13 power cord set requirements Eâ2 spare part numbers 3â27, 3â29 power light 1â6 , 1â19 power management features 1â5 power, troubleshooting 2â8 processor removal 5â33 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â34 , 3â36 , 3â40 , 5â33 R rear components 1â10 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ7 RJ-45 jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ8 RTC battery illustrated 3â22 removal 5â35 RTC battery cable, disconnection 5â49 S Screw Kit contents Aâ1 spare part number 3â28, Aâ1 screw listing Aâ1, Bâ1 security cable slot 1â13 serial connector module removal 5â64 spare part number 3â19, 3â35 , 5â64 serial connector module cable, illustrated 3â23 serial number 3â1, 5â2 serial port location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ3 service considerations 4â2 speaker location 1â7 removal 5â51 spare part number 3â11, 3â35 , 5â51 speaker cable, disconnection 5â52 specifications battery pack 6â7 CD-ROM drive 6â13 computer 6â1 display 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 6â9 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive 6â11 DVD-ROM drive 6â8 hard drive 6â6 I/O addresses 6â17 interrupts 6â15 memory map 6â20
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ7 optical drive 6â8, 6â9, 6â11 , 6â13 system DMA 6â14 static shielding materials 4â8 stringent security 1â4 S-Video-out jack location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ5 switch cover removal 5â40 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â34 , 5â40 system board removal 5â61 spare part numbers 3â11, 3â33 , 3â40 , 5â61 system DMA 6â14 system memory map 6â20 T Thermal Grease Kit, spare part number 3â7, 3â35, 5â30 thermal paste, replacement 5â32 tools required 4â1 top components 1â16, 1â18 top cover removal 5â46 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â33 , 5â46 TouchPad 1â19 TouchPad cable disconnection 5â49 illustrated 3â23 TouchPad left/right buttons 1â19 TouchPad scroll zone 1â19 transporting precautions 4â5 travel battery, spare part number 3â26, 3â29 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â1 expansion product 2â14 flowcharts 2â6 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â14 , 2â23 OS loading 2â15 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 power 2â8 video 2â12 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â9, 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 unknown password 1â4 USB/audio board removal 5â59 spare part number 3â11, 3â35 , 5â59 USB/audio board cable, illustrated 3â23
Inde xâ8 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Inde x V video troubleshooting 2â12 volume buttons 1â17 W Windows applications key 1â15 Windows logo key 1â15 wireless button 1â17 wireless light 1â6, 1â17 WLAN Mini Card module spare part numbers 3â30, 3â31 , 3â32 , 3â33 workstation precautions 4â6